diff --git a/man/pandoc-lua.1 b/man/pandoc-lua.1
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/pandoc-lua.1
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+.\" Automatically generated by Pandoc 3.1.9
+.\"
+.TH "pandoc-lua" "1" "September 22, 2022" "pandoc 3.1.9" "Pandoc User\[cq]s Guide"
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\f[CR]pandoc-lua\f[R] [\f[I]options\f[R]] [\f[I]script\f[R]
+[\f[I]args\f[R]]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\f[CR]pandoc-lua\f[R] is a standalone Lua interpreter with behavior
+similar to that of the standard \f[CR]lua\f[R] executable, but exposing
+all of pandoc\[cq]s Lua libraries.
+All \f[CR]pandoc.*\f[R] packages, as well as the packages \f[CR]re\f[R]
+and \f[CR]lpeg\f[R], are available via global variables.
+Furthermore, the globals \f[CR]PANDOC_VERSION\f[R],
+\f[CR]PANDOC_STATE\f[R], and \f[CR]PANDOC_API_VERSION\f[R] are set at
+startup.
+.PP
+If no script argument is given, then the script is assumed to be passed
+in via \f[I]stdin\f[R].
+When called without arguments, \f[CR]pandoc-lua\f[R] behaves as
+\f[CR]pandoc-lua -v -i\f[R] when the standard input (\f[CR]stdin\f[R])
+is a terminal, and as \f[CR]pandoc-lua -\f[R] otherwise.
+On Windows the program will always behave as if it was connected to a
+terminal.
+.PP
+When called without the option \f[CR]-E\f[R], the interpreter checks for
+an environment variable \f[CR]LUA_INIT\f[R] before running any argument.
+If the variable content has the format
+\f[I]\f[CI]\[at]filename\f[I]\f[R], then \f[CR]pandoc-lua\f[R] executes
+the file.
+Otherwise, \f[CR]pandoc-lua\f[R] executes the string itself.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+\f[CR]-e stat\f[R]
+Execute statement \f[CR]stat\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-l mod\f[R]
+If mod has the pattern \f[CR]g=m\f[R], then require library \f[CR]m\f[R]
+into global \f[CR]g\f[R]; otherwise require library \f[CR]mod\f[R] into
+global \f[CR]mod\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-v\f[R]
+Show version information.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-i\f[R]
+Enter interactive mode after running \f[I]script\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-E\f[R]
+Ignore environment variables.
+This is not fully implemented yet and only ignores the
+\f[CR]LUA_INIT\f[R] variable.
+Other variables like \f[CR]LUA_PATH\f[R] and \f[CR]LUA_CPATH\f[R] are
+\f[B]not\f[R] ignored.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-W\f[R]
+Turn warnings on.
+.SH INTERACTIVE MODE
+In interactive mode, the Lua interpreter repeatedly prompts and waits
+for a line.
+After reading a line, Lua first tries to interpret the line as an
+expression.
+If it succeeds, it prints its value.
+Otherwise, it interprets the line as a statement.
+If you write an incomplete statement, the interpreter waits for its
+completion by issuing a different prompt.
+.PP
+Exit the interactive mode by pressing \f[CR]Ctrl-D\f[R] or
+\f[CR]Ctrl-C\f[R], or by typing \f[CR]os.exit()\f[R].
+The \f[I]Isocline\f[R] library is used for line editing.
+Press \f[CR]F1\f[R] to get a list of available keybindings; the
+\f[CR]ctrl\f[R] key is abbreviated as \f[CR]\[ha]\f[R] in that list.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Copyright 2023 John MacFarlane (jgm\[at]berkeley.edu) and contributors.
+Released under the GPL, version 2 or later.
+This software carries no warranty of any kind.
+(See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and warranty notices.)
+.PP
+Lua: Copyright 1994-2022 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
+.PP
+The Pandoc source code may be downloaded
+from <https://hackage.haskell.org/package/pandoc> or
+<https://github.com/jgm/pandoc/releases>.  Further
+documentation is available at <https://pandoc.org>.
diff --git a/man/pandoc-server.1 b/man/pandoc-server.1
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/pandoc-server.1
@@ -0,0 +1,348 @@
+.\" Automatically generated by Pandoc 3.1.9
+.\"
+.TH "pandoc-server" "1" "August 15, 2022" "pandoc 3.1.9" "Pandoc User\[cq]s Guide"
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R] [\f[I]options\f[R]]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+\f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R] is a web server that can perform pandoc
+conversions.
+It can be used either as a running server or as a CGI program.
+.PP
+To use \f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R] as a CGI program, rename it (or symlink
+it) as \f[CR]pandoc-server.cgi\f[R].
+(Note: if you symlink it, you may need to adjust your webserver\[cq]s
+configuration in order to allow it to follow symlinks for the CGI
+script.)
+.PP
+All pandoc functions are run in the PandocPure monad, which ensures that
+they can do no I/O operations on the server.
+This should provide a high degree of security.
+This security does, however, impose certain limitations:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+PDFs cannot be produced.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Filters are not supported.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Resources cannot be fetched via HTTP.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Any images, include files, or other resources needed for the document
+conversion must be explicitly included in the request, via the
+\f[CR]files\f[R] field (see below under API).
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+\f[CR]--port NUM\f[R]
+HTTP port on which to run the server.
+Default: 3030.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--timeout SECONDS\f[R]
+Timeout in seconds, after which a conversion is killed.
+Default: 2.
+.RS
+.PP
+When \f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R] is run as a CGI program, this option can
+be set via the \f[CR]PANDOC_SERVER_TIMEOUT\f[R] environment variable.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--help\f[R]
+Print this help.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--version\f[R]
+Print version.
+.SH API
+.SS Root endpoint
+The root (\f[CR]/\f[R]) endpoint accepts only POST requests.
+.SS Response
+It returns a converted document in one of the following formats (in
+order of preference), depending on the \f[CR]Accept\f[R] header:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]application/octet-stream\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]text/plain\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]application/json\f[R]
+.PP
+If the result is a binary format (e.g., \f[CR]epub\f[R] or
+\f[CR]docx\f[R]) and the content is returned as plain text or JSON, the
+binary will be base64 encoded.
+.PP
+If a JSON response is given, it will have one of the following formats.
+If the conversion is not successful:
+.IP
+.EX
+{ \[dq]error\[dq]: string with the error message }
+.EE
+.PP
+If the conversion is successful:
+.IP
+.EX
+{ \[dq]output\[dq]: string with textual or base64-encoded binary output,
+  \[dq]base64\[dq]: boolean (true means the \[dq]output\[dq] is base64-encoded),
+  \[dq]messages\[dq]: array of message objects (see below) }
+.EE
+.PP
+Each element of the \[lq]messages\[rq] array will have the format
+.IP
+.EX
+{ \[dq]message\[dq]: string,
+  \[dq]verbosity\[dq]: string (either \[dq]WARNING\[dq] or \[dq]INFO\[dq]) }
+.EE
+.SS Request
+The body of the POST request should be a JSON object, with the following
+fields.
+Only the \f[CR]text\f[R] field is required; all of the others can be
+omitted for default values.
+When there are several string alternatives, the first one given is the
+default.
+.TP
+\f[CR]text\f[R] (string)
+The document to be converted.
+Note: if the \f[CR]from\f[R] format is binary (e.g., \f[CR]epub\f[R] or
+\f[CR]docx\f[R]), then \f[CR]text\f[R] should be a base64 encoding of
+the document.
+.TP
+\f[CR]from\f[R] (string, default \f[CR]\[dq]markdown\[dq]\f[R])
+The input format, possibly with extensions, just as it is specified on
+the pandoc command line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]to\f[R] (string, default \f[CR]\[dq]html\[dq]\f[R])
+The output format, possibly with extensions, just as it is specified on
+the pandoc command line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]shift-heading-level-by\f[R] (integer, default 0)
+Increase or decrease the level of all headings.
+.TP
+\f[CR]indented-code-classes\f[R] (array of strings)
+List of classes to be applied to indented Markdown code blocks.
+.TP
+\f[CR]default-image-extension\f[R] (string)
+Extension to be applied to image sources that lack extensions
+(e.g.\ \f[CR]\[dq].jpg\[dq]\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]metadata\f[R] (JSON map)
+String-valued metadata.
+.TP
+\f[CR]tab-stop\f[R] (integer, default 4)
+Tab stop (spaces per tab).
+.TP
+\f[CR]track-changes\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]accept\[dq]|\[dq]reject\[dq]|\[dq]all\[dq]\f[R])
+Specifies what to do with insertions, deletions, and comments produced
+by the MS Word \[lq]Track Changes\[rq] feature.
+Only affects docx input.
+.TP
+\f[CR]abbreviations\f[R] (file path)
+List of strings to be regarded as abbreviations when parsing Markdown.
+See \f[CR]--abbreviations\f[R] in \f[CR]pandoc(1)\f[R] for details.
+.TP
+\f[CR]standalone\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+If true, causes a standalone document to be produced, using the default
+template or the custom template specified using \f[CR]template\f[R].
+If false, a fragment will be produced.
+.TP
+\f[CR]template\f[R] (string)
+String contents of a document template (see Templates in
+\f[CR]pandoc(1)\f[R] for the format).
+.TP
+\f[CR]variables\f[R] (JSON map)
+Variables to be interpolated in the template.
+(See Templates in \f[CR]pandoc(1)\f[R].)
+.TP
+\f[CR]dpi\f[R] (integer, default 96)
+Dots-per-inch to use for conversions between pixels and other
+measurements (for image sizes).
+.TP
+\f[CR]wrap\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]auto\[dq]|\[dq]preserve\[dq]|\[dq]none\[dq]\f[R])
+Text wrapping option: either \f[CR]\[dq]auto\[dq]\f[R] (automatic
+hard-wrapping to fit within a column width),
+\f[CR]\[dq]preserve\[dq]\f[R] (insert newlines where they are present in
+the source), or \f[CR]\[dq]none\[dq]\f[R] (don\[cq]t insert any
+unnecessary newlines at all).
+.TP
+\f[CR]columns\f[R] (integer, default 72)
+Column width (affects text wrapping and calculation of table column
+widths in plain text formats)
+.TP
+\f[CR]table-of-contents\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Include a table of contents (in supported formats).
+.TP
+\f[CR]toc-depth\f[R] (integer, default 3)
+Depth of sections to include in the table of contents.
+.TP
+\f[CR]strip-comments\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Causes HTML comments to be stripped in Markdown or Textile source,
+instead of being passed through to the output format.
+.TP
+\f[CR]highlight-style\f[R] (string, leave unset for no highlighting)
+Specify the style to use for syntax highlighting of code.
+Standard styles are \f[CR]\[dq]pygments\[dq]\f[R] (the default),
+\f[CR]\[dq]kate\[dq]\f[R], \f[CR]\[dq]monochrome\[dq]\f[R],
+\f[CR]\[dq]breezeDark\[dq]\f[R], \f[CR]\[dq]espresso\[dq]\f[R],
+\f[CR]\[dq]zenburn\[dq]\f[R], \f[CR]\[dq]haddock\[dq]\f[R], and
+\f[CR]\[dq]tango\[dq]\f[R].
+Alternatively, the path of a \f[CR].theme\f[R] with a KDE syntax theme
+may be used (in this case, the relevant file contents must also be
+included in \f[CR]files\f[R], see below).
+.TP
+\f[CR]embed-resources\f[R]
+Embed images, scripts, styles and other resources in an HTML document
+using \f[CR]data\f[R] URIs.
+Note that this will not work unless the contents of all external
+resources are included under \f[CR]files\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]html-q-tags\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Use \f[CR]<q>\f[R] elements in HTML instead of literal quotation marks.
+.TP
+\f[CR]ascii\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Use entities and escapes when possible to avoid non-ASCII characters in
+the output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]reference-links\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Create reference links rather than inline links in Markdown output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]reference-location\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]document\[dq]|\[dq]section\[dq]|\[dq]block\[dq]\f[R])
+Determines whether link references and footnotes are placed at the end
+of the document, the end of the section, or the end of the block
+(e.g.\ paragraph), in certain formats.
+(See \f[CR]pandoc(1)\f[R] under \f[CR]--reference-location\f[R].)
+.TP
+\f[CR]setext-headers\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Use Setext (underlined) headings instead of ATX (\f[CR]#\f[R]-prefixed)
+in Markdown output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]top-level-division\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]default\[dq]|\[dq]part\[dq]|\[dq]chapter\[dq]|\[dq]section\[dq]\f[R])
+Determines how top-level headings are interpreted in LaTeX, ConTeXt,
+DocBook, and TEI.
+The \f[CR]\[dq]default\[dq]\f[R] value tries to choose the best
+interpretation based on heuristics.
+.TP
+\f[CR]number-sections\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Automatically number sections (in supported formats).
+.TP
+\f[CR]number-offset\f[R] (array of integers)
+Offsets to be added to each component of the section number.
+For example, \f[CR][1]\f[R] will cause the first section to be numbered
+\[lq]2\[rq] and the first subsection \[lq]2.1\[rq]; \f[CR][0,1]\f[R]
+will cause the first section to be numbered \[lq]1\[rq] and the first
+subsection \[lq]1.2.\[rq]
+.TP
+\f[CR]html-math-method\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]plain\[dq]|\[dq]webtex\[dq]|\[dq]gladtex\[dq]|\[dq]mathml\[dq]|\[dq]mathjax\[dq]|\[dq]katex\[dq]\f[R])
+Determines how math is represented in HTML.
+.TP
+\f[CR]listings\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Use the \f[CR]listings\f[R] package to format code in LaTeX output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]incremental\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+If true, lists appear incrementally by default in slide shows.
+.TP
+\f[CR]slide-level\f[R] (integer)
+Heading level that deterimes slide divisions in slide shows.
+The default is to pick the highest heading level under which there is
+body text.
+.TP
+\f[CR]section-divs\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Arrange the document into a hierarchy of nested sections based on the
+headings.
+.TP
+\f[CR]email-obfuscation\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]none\[dq]|\[dq]references\[dq]|\[dq]javascript\[dq]\f[R])
+Determines how email addresses are obfuscated in HTML.
+.TP
+\f[CR]identifier-prefix\f[R] (string)
+Prefix to be added to all automatically-generated identifiers.
+.TP
+\f[CR]title-prefix\f[R] (string)
+Prefix to be added to the title in the HTML header.
+.TP
+\f[CR]reference-doc\f[R] (file path)
+Reference doc to use in creating \f[CR]docx\f[R] or \f[CR]odt\f[R] or
+\f[CR]pptx\f[R].
+See \f[CR]pandoc(1)\f[R] under \f[CR]--reference-doc\f[R] for details.
+The contents of the file must be included under \f[CR]files\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]split-level\f[R] (integer, default 1)
+Heading level at which documents are split in EPUB or chunked HTML.
+.TP
+\f[CR]epub-cover-image\f[R] (file path)
+Cover image for EPUB.
+The contents of the file must be included under \f[CR]files\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]epub-metadata\f[R] (file path)
+Path of file containing Dublin core XML elements to be used for EPUB
+metadata.
+The contents of the file must be included under \f[CR]files\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]epub-subdirectory\f[R] (string, default \[lq]EPUB\[rq])
+Name of content subdirectory in the EPUB container.
+.TP
+\f[CR]epub-fonts\f[R] (array of file paths)
+Fonts to include in the EPUB.
+The fonts themselves must be included in \f[CR]files\f[R] (see below).
+.TP
+\f[CR]ipynb-output\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]best\[dq]|\[dq]all\[dq]|\[dq]none\[dq]\f[R])
+Determines how ipynb output cells are treated.
+\f[CR]all\f[R] means that all of the data formats included in the
+original are preserved.
+\f[CR]none\f[R] means that the contents of data cells are omitted.
+\f[CR]best\f[R] causes pandoc to try to pick the richest data block in
+each output cell that is compatible with the output format.
+.TP
+\f[CR]citeproc\f[R] (boolean, default false)
+Causes citations to be processed using citeproc.
+See Citations in \f[CR]pandoc(1)\f[R] for details.
+.TP
+\f[CR]bibliography\f[R] (array of file paths)
+Files containing bibliographic data.
+The contents of the files must be included in \f[CR]files\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]csl\f[R] (file path)
+CSL style file.
+The contents of the file must be included in \f[CR]files\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]cite-method\f[R] (\f[CR]\[dq]citeproc\[dq]|\[dq]natbib\[dq]|\[dq]biblatex\[dq]\f[R])
+Determines how citations are formatted in LaTeX output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]files\f[R] (JSON mapping of file paths to base64-encoded strings)
+Any files needed for the conversion, including images referred to in the
+document source, should be included here.
+Binary data must be base64-encoded.
+Textual data may be left as it is, unless it is \f[I]also\f[R] valid
+base 64 data, in which case it will be interpreted that way.
+.SS \f[CR]/batch\f[R] endpoint
+The \f[CR]/batch\f[R] endpoint behaves like the root endpoint, except
+for these two points:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+It accepts a JSON array, each element of which is a JSON object like the
+one expected by the root endpoint.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+It returns a JSON array of JSON results.
+.PP
+This endpoint can be used to convert a sequence of small snippets in one
+request.
+.SS \f[CR]/version\f[R] endpoint
+The \f[CR]/version\f[R] endpoint accepts a GET request and returns the
+pandoc version as a plain or JSON-encoded string, depending on Accept
+headers.
+.SS \f[CR]/babelmark\f[R] endpoint
+The \f[CR]/babelmark\f[R] endpoint accepts a GET request with the
+following query parameters:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]text\f[R] (required string)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]from\f[R] (optional string, default is
+\f[CR]\[dq]markdown\[dq]\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]to\f[R] (optional string, default is \f[CR]\[dq]html\[dq]\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]standalone\f[R] (optional boolean, default is \f[CR]false\f[R])
+.PP
+It returns a JSON object with fields \f[CR]html\f[R] and
+\f[CR]version\f[R].
+This endpoint is designed to support the Babelmark website.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Copyright 2022 John MacFarlane (jgm\[at]berkeley.edu).
+Released under the GPL, version 2 or greater.
+This software carries no warranty of any kind.
+(See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and warranty notices.)
+.PP
+The Pandoc source code may be downloaded
+from <https://hackage.haskell.org/package/pandoc> or
+<https://github.com/jgm/pandoc/releases>.  Further
+documentation is available at <https://pandoc.org>.
diff --git a/man/pandoc.1 b/man/pandoc.1
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/man/pandoc.1
@@ -0,0 +1,7657 @@
+.\" Automatically generated by Pandoc 3.1.9
+.\"
+.TH "pandoc" "1" "December 11, 2023" "pandoc 3.1.10" "Pandoc User\[cq]s Guide"
+.SH NAME
+pandoc - general markup converter
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\f[CR]pandoc\f[R] [\f[I]options\f[R]] [\f[I]input-file\f[R]]\&...
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Pandoc is a Haskell library for converting from one markup format to
+another, and a command-line tool that uses this library.
+.PP
+Pandoc can convert between numerous markup and word processing formats,
+including, but not limited to, various flavors of Markdown, HTML, LaTeX
+and Word docx.
+For the full lists of input and output formats, see the
+\f[CR]--from\f[R] and \f[CR]--to\f[R] options below.
+Pandoc can also produce PDF output: see creating a PDF, below.
+.PP
+Pandoc\[cq]s enhanced version of Markdown includes syntax for tables,
+definition lists, metadata blocks, footnotes, citations, math, and much
+more.
+See below under Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown.
+.PP
+Pandoc has a modular design: it consists of a set of readers, which
+parse text in a given format and produce a native representation of the
+document (an \f[I]abstract syntax tree\f[R] or AST), and a set of
+writers, which convert this native representation into a target format.
+Thus, adding an input or output format requires only adding a reader or
+writer.
+Users can also run custom pandoc filters to modify the intermediate AST.
+.PP
+Because pandoc\[cq]s intermediate representation of a document is less
+expressive than many of the formats it converts between, one should not
+expect perfect conversions between every format and every other.
+Pandoc attempts to preserve the structural elements of a document, but
+not formatting details such as margin size.
+And some document elements, such as complex tables, may not fit into
+pandoc\[cq]s simple document model.
+While conversions from pandoc\[cq]s Markdown to all formats aspire to be
+perfect, conversions from formats more expressive than pandoc\[cq]s
+Markdown can be expected to be lossy.
+.SS Using pandoc
+If no \f[I]input-files\f[R] are specified, input is read from
+\f[I]stdin\f[R].
+Output goes to \f[I]stdout\f[R] by default.
+For output to a file, use the \f[CR]-o\f[R] option:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -o output.html input.txt
+.EE
+.PP
+By default, pandoc produces a document fragment.
+To produce a standalone document (e.g.\ a valid HTML file including
+\f[CR]<head>\f[R] and \f[CR]<body>\f[R]), use the \f[CR]-s\f[R] or
+\f[CR]--standalone\f[R] flag:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -s -o output.html input.txt
+.EE
+.PP
+For more information on how standalone documents are produced, see
+Templates below.
+.PP
+If multiple input files are given, pandoc will concatenate them all
+(with blank lines between them) before parsing.
+(Use \f[CR]--file-scope\f[R] to parse files individually.)
+.SS Specifying formats
+The format of the input and output can be specified explicitly using
+command-line options.
+The input format can be specified using the \f[CR]-f/--from\f[R] option,
+the output format using the \f[CR]-t/--to\f[R] option.
+Thus, to convert \f[CR]hello.txt\f[R] from Markdown to LaTeX, you could
+type:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -f markdown -t latex hello.txt
+.EE
+.PP
+To convert \f[CR]hello.html\f[R] from HTML to Markdown:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -f html -t markdown hello.html
+.EE
+.PP
+Supported input and output formats are listed below under Options (see
+\f[CR]-f\f[R] for input formats and \f[CR]-t\f[R] for output formats).
+You can also use \f[CR]pandoc --list-input-formats\f[R] and
+\f[CR]pandoc --list-output-formats\f[R] to print lists of supported
+formats.
+.PP
+If the input or output format is not specified explicitly, pandoc will
+attempt to guess it from the extensions of the filenames.
+Thus, for example,
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -o hello.tex hello.txt
+.EE
+.PP
+will convert \f[CR]hello.txt\f[R] from Markdown to LaTeX.
+If no output file is specified (so that output goes to
+\f[I]stdout\f[R]), or if the output file\[cq]s extension is unknown, the
+output format will default to HTML.
+If no input file is specified (so that input comes from
+\f[I]stdin\f[R]), or if the input files\[cq] extensions are unknown, the
+input format will be assumed to be Markdown.
+.SS Character encoding
+Pandoc uses the UTF-8 character encoding for both input and output.
+If your local character encoding is not UTF-8, you should pipe input and
+output through \f[CR]iconv\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+iconv -t utf-8 input.txt | pandoc | iconv -f utf-8
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that in some output formats (such as HTML, LaTeX, ConTeXt, RTF,
+OPML, DocBook, and Texinfo), information about the character encoding is
+included in the document header, which will only be included if you use
+the \f[CR]-s/--standalone\f[R] option.
+.SS Creating a PDF
+To produce a PDF, specify an output file with a \f[CR].pdf\f[R]
+extension:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc test.txt -o test.pdf
+.EE
+.PP
+By default, pandoc will use LaTeX to create the PDF, which requires that
+a LaTeX engine be installed (see \f[CR]--pdf-engine\f[R] below).
+Alternatively, pandoc can use ConTeXt, roff ms, or HTML as an
+intermediate format.
+To do this, specify an output file with a \f[CR].pdf\f[R] extension, as
+before, but add the \f[CR]--pdf-engine\f[R] option or
+\f[CR]-t context\f[R], \f[CR]-t html\f[R], or \f[CR]-t ms\f[R] to the
+command line.
+The tool used to generate the PDF from the intermediate format may be
+specified using \f[CR]--pdf-engine\f[R].
+.PP
+You can control the PDF style using variables, depending on the
+intermediate format used: see variables for LaTeX, variables for
+ConTeXt, variables for \f[CR]wkhtmltopdf\f[R], variables for ms.
+When HTML is used as an intermediate format, the output can be styled
+using \f[CR]--css\f[R].
+.PP
+To debug the PDF creation, it can be useful to look at the intermediate
+representation: instead of \f[CR]-o test.pdf\f[R], use for example
+\f[CR]-s -o test.tex\f[R] to output the generated LaTeX.
+You can then test it with \f[CR]pdflatex test.tex\f[R].
+.PP
+When using LaTeX, the following packages need to be available (they are
+included with all recent versions of TeX Live): \f[CR]amsfonts\f[R],
+\f[CR]amsmath\f[R], \f[CR]lm\f[R], \f[CR]unicode-math\f[R],
+\f[CR]iftex\f[R], \f[CR]listings\f[R] (if the \f[CR]--listings\f[R]
+option is used), \f[CR]fancyvrb\f[R], \f[CR]longtable\f[R],
+\f[CR]booktabs\f[R], \f[CR]graphicx\f[R] (if the document contains
+images), \f[CR]bookmark\f[R], \f[CR]xcolor\f[R], \f[CR]soul\f[R],
+\f[CR]geometry\f[R] (with the \f[CR]geometry\f[R] variable set),
+\f[CR]setspace\f[R] (with \f[CR]linestretch\f[R]), and \f[CR]babel\f[R]
+(with \f[CR]lang\f[R]).
+If \f[CR]CJKmainfont\f[R] is set, \f[CR]xeCJK\f[R] is needed.
+The use of \f[CR]xelatex\f[R] or \f[CR]lualatex\f[R] as the PDF engine
+requires \f[CR]fontspec\f[R].
+\f[CR]lualatex\f[R] uses \f[CR]selnolig\f[R].
+\f[CR]xelatex\f[R] uses \f[CR]bidi\f[R] (with the \f[CR]dir\f[R]
+variable set).
+If the \f[CR]mathspec\f[R] variable is set, \f[CR]xelatex\f[R] will use
+\f[CR]mathspec\f[R] instead of \f[CR]unicode-math\f[R].
+The \f[CR]upquote\f[R] and \f[CR]microtype\f[R] packages are used if
+available, and \f[CR]csquotes\f[R] will be used for typography if the
+\f[CR]csquotes\f[R] variable or metadata field is set to a true value.
+The \f[CR]natbib\f[R], \f[CR]biblatex\f[R], \f[CR]bibtex\f[R], and
+\f[CR]biber\f[R] packages can optionally be used for citation rendering.
+The following packages will be used to improve output quality if
+present, but pandoc does not require them to be present:
+\f[CR]upquote\f[R] (for straight quotes in verbatim environments),
+\f[CR]microtype\f[R] (for better spacing adjustments),
+\f[CR]parskip\f[R] (for better inter-paragraph spaces), \f[CR]xurl\f[R]
+(for better line breaks in URLs), and \f[CR]footnotehyper\f[R] or
+\f[CR]footnote\f[R] (to allow footnotes in tables).
+.SS Reading from the Web
+Instead of an input file, an absolute URI may be given.
+In this case pandoc will fetch the content using HTTP:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -f html -t markdown https://www.fsf.org
+.EE
+.PP
+It is possible to supply a custom User-Agent string or other header when
+requesting a document from a URL:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -f html -t markdown --request-header User-Agent:\[dq]Mozilla/5.0\[dq] \[rs]
+  https://www.fsf.org
+.EE
+.SH OPTIONS
+.SS General options
+.TP
+\f[CR]-f\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]-r\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]--from=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]--read=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
+Specify input format.
+\f[I]FORMAT\f[R] can be:
+.RS
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]bibtex\f[R] (BibTeX bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]biblatex\f[R] (BibLaTeX bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]bits\f[R] (BITS XML, alias for \f[CR]jats\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]creole\f[R] (Creole 1.0)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]csljson\f[R] (CSL JSON bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]csv\f[R] (CSV table)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]tsv\f[R] (TSV table)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]docbook\f[R] (DocBook)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]docx\f[R] (Word docx)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]dokuwiki\f[R] (DokuWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]endnotexml\f[R] (EndNote XML bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]epub\f[R] (EPUB)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]fb2\f[R] (FictionBook2 e-book)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]gfm\f[R] (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
+accurate \f[CR]markdown_github\f[R]; use \f[CR]markdown_github\f[R] only
+if you need extensions not supported in \f[CR]gfm\f[R].
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]haddock\f[R] (Haddock markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]html\f[R] (HTML)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]ipynb\f[R] (Jupyter notebook)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jats\f[R] (JATS XML)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jira\f[R] (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]json\f[R] (JSON version of native AST)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]latex\f[R] (LaTeX)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R] (Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] (original unextended Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]mediawiki\f[R] (MediaWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]man\f[R] (roff man)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]muse\f[R] (Muse)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]native\f[R] (native Haskell)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]odt\f[R] (ODT)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]opml\f[R] (OPML)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]org\f[R] (Emacs Org mode)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]ris\f[R] (RIS bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]rtf\f[R] (Rich Text Format)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]rst\f[R] (reStructuredText)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]t2t\f[R] (txt2tags)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]textile\f[R] (Textile)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]tikiwiki\f[R] (TikiWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]twiki\f[R] (TWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]typst\f[R] (typst)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]vimwiki\f[R] (Vimwiki)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+the path of a custom Lua reader, see Custom readers and writers below
+.PP
+Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by appending
+\f[CR]+EXTENSION\f[R] or \f[CR]-EXTENSION\f[R] to the format name.
+See Extensions below, for a list of extensions and their names.
+See \f[CR]--list-input-formats\f[R] and \f[CR]--list-extensions\f[R],
+below.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]-t\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]-w\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]--to=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]--write=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
+Specify output format.
+\f[I]FORMAT\f[R] can be:
+.RS
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]asciidoc\f[R] (modern AsciiDoc as interpreted by AsciiDoctor)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]asciidoc_legacy\f[R] (AsciiDoc as interpreted by
+\f[CR]asciidoc-py\f[R]).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]asciidoctor\f[R] (deprecated synonym for \f[CR]asciidoc\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]beamer\f[R] (LaTeX beamer slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]bibtex\f[R] (BibTeX bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]biblatex\f[R] (BibLaTeX bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]chunkedhtml\f[R] (zip archive of multiple linked HTML files)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark Markdown with extensions)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]context\f[R] (ConTeXt)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]csljson\f[R] (CSL JSON bibliography)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]docbook\f[R] or \f[CR]docbook4\f[R] (DocBook 4)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]docbook5\f[R] (DocBook 5)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]docx\f[R] (Word docx)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]dokuwiki\f[R] (DokuWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]epub\f[R] or \f[CR]epub3\f[R] (EPUB v3 book)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]epub2\f[R] (EPUB v2)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]fb2\f[R] (FictionBook2 e-book)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]gfm\f[R] (GitHub-Flavored Markdown), or the deprecated and less
+accurate \f[CR]markdown_github\f[R]; use \f[CR]markdown_github\f[R] only
+if you need extensions not supported in \f[CR]gfm\f[R].
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]haddock\f[R] (Haddock markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]html\f[R] or \f[CR]html5\f[R] (HTML, i.e.\ HTML5/XHTML polyglot
+markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]html4\f[R] (XHTML 1.0 Transitional)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]icml\f[R] (InDesign ICML)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]ipynb\f[R] (Jupyter notebook)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jats_archiving\f[R] (JATS XML, Archiving and Interchange Tag Set)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jats_articleauthoring\f[R] (JATS XML, Article Authoring Tag Set)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jats_publishing\f[R] (JATS XML, Journal Publishing Tag Set)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jats\f[R] (alias for \f[CR]jats_archiving\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]jira\f[R] (Jira/Confluence wiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]json\f[R] (JSON version of native AST)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]latex\f[R] (LaTeX)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]man\f[R] (roff man)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R] (Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] (original unextended Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markua\f[R] (Markua)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]mediawiki\f[R] (MediaWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]ms\f[R] (roff ms)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]muse\f[R] (Muse)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]native\f[R] (native Haskell)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]odt\f[R] (OpenOffice text document)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]opml\f[R] (OPML)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]opendocument\f[R] (OpenDocument)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]org\f[R] (Emacs Org mode)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]pdf\f[R] (PDF)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]plain\f[R] (plain text)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]pptx\f[R] (PowerPoint slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]rst\f[R] (reStructuredText)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]rtf\f[R] (Rich Text Format)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]texinfo\f[R] (GNU Texinfo)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]textile\f[R] (Textile)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]slideous\f[R] (Slideous HTML and JavaScript slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]slidy\f[R] (Slidy HTML and JavaScript slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]dzslides\f[R] (DZSlides HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]revealjs\f[R] (reveal.js HTML5 + JavaScript slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]s5\f[R] (S5 HTML and JavaScript slide show)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]tei\f[R] (TEI Simple)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]typst\f[R] (typst)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]xwiki\f[R] (XWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]zimwiki\f[R] (ZimWiki markup)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+the path of a custom Lua writer, see Custom readers and writers below
+.PP
+Note that \f[CR]odt\f[R], \f[CR]docx\f[R], \f[CR]epub\f[R], and
+\f[CR]pdf\f[R] output will not be directed to \f[I]stdout\f[R] unless
+forced with \f[CR]-o -\f[R].
+.PP
+Extensions can be individually enabled or disabled by appending
+\f[CR]+EXTENSION\f[R] or \f[CR]-EXTENSION\f[R] to the format name.
+See Extensions below, for a list of extensions and their names.
+See \f[CR]--list-output-formats\f[R] and \f[CR]--list-extensions\f[R],
+below.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]-o\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[CR]--output=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Write output to \f[I]FILE\f[R] instead of \f[I]stdout\f[R].
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is \f[CR]-\f[R], output will go to \f[I]stdout\f[R],
+even if a non-textual format (\f[CR]docx\f[R], \f[CR]odt\f[R],
+\f[CR]epub2\f[R], \f[CR]epub3\f[R]) is specified.
+If the output format is \f[CR]chunkedhtml\f[R] and \f[I]FILE\f[R] has no
+extension, then instead of producing a \f[CR].zip\f[R] file pandoc will
+create a directory \f[I]FILE\f[R] and unpack the zip archive there
+(unless \f[I]FILE\f[R] already exists, in which case an error will be
+raised).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--data-dir=\f[R]\f[I]DIRECTORY\f[R]
+Specify the user data directory to search for pandoc data files.
+If this option is not specified, the default user data directory will be
+used.
+On *nix and macOS systems this will be the \f[CR]pandoc\f[R]
+subdirectory of the XDG data directory (by default,
+\f[CR]$HOME/.local/share\f[R], overridable by setting the
+\f[CR]XDG_DATA_HOME\f[R] environment variable).
+If that directory does not exist and \f[CR]$HOME/.pandoc\f[R] exists, it
+will be used (for backwards compatibility).
+On Windows the default user data directory is
+\f[CR]%APPDATA%\[rs]pandoc\f[R].
+You can find the default user data directory on your system by looking
+at the output of \f[CR]pandoc --version\f[R].
+Data files placed in this directory (for example,
+\f[CR]reference.odt\f[R], \f[CR]reference.docx\f[R],
+\f[CR]epub.css\f[R], \f[CR]templates\f[R]) will override pandoc\[cq]s
+normal defaults.
+(Note that the user data directory is not created by pandoc, so you will
+need to create it yourself if you want to make use of it.)
+.TP
+\f[CR]-d\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[CR]--defaults=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Specify a set of default option settings.
+\f[I]FILE\f[R] is a YAML file whose fields correspond to command-line
+option settings.
+All options for document conversion, including input and output files,
+can be set using a defaults file.
+The file will be searched for first in the working directory, and then
+in the \f[CR]defaults\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+The \f[CR].yaml\f[R] extension may be omitted.
+See the section Defaults files for more information on the file format.
+Settings from the defaults file may be overridden or extended by
+subsequent options on the command line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--bash-completion\f[R]
+Generate a bash completion script.
+To enable bash completion with pandoc, add this to your
+\f[CR].bashrc\f[R]:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+eval \[dq]$(pandoc --bash-completion)\[dq]
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--verbose\f[R]
+Give verbose debugging output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--quiet\f[R]
+Suppress warning messages.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--fail-if-warnings[=true|false]\f[R]
+Exit with error status if there are any warnings.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--log=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Write log messages in machine-readable JSON format to \f[I]FILE\f[R].
+All messages above DEBUG level will be written, regardless of verbosity
+settings (\f[CR]--verbose\f[R], \f[CR]--quiet\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--list-input-formats\f[R]
+List supported input formats, one per line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--list-output-formats\f[R]
+List supported output formats, one per line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--list-extensions\f[R][\f[CR]=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]]
+List supported extensions for \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], one per line, preceded
+by a \f[CR]+\f[R] or \f[CR]-\f[R] indicating whether it is enabled by
+default in \f[I]FORMAT\f[R].
+If \f[I]FORMAT\f[R] is not specified, defaults for pandoc\[cq]s Markdown
+are given.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--list-highlight-languages\f[R]
+List supported languages for syntax highlighting, one per line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--list-highlight-styles\f[R]
+List supported styles for syntax highlighting, one per line.
+See \f[CR]--highlight-style\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-v\f[R], \f[CR]--version\f[R]
+Print version.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-h\f[R], \f[CR]--help\f[R]
+Show usage message.
+.SS Reader options
+.TP
+\f[CR]--shift-heading-level-by=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Shift heading levels by a positive or negative integer.
+For example, with \f[CR]--shift-heading-level-by=-1\f[R], level 2
+headings become level 1 headings, and level 3 headings become level 2
+headings.
+Headings cannot have a level less than 1, so a heading that would be
+shifted below level 1 becomes a regular paragraph.
+Exception: with a shift of -N, a level-N heading at the beginning of the
+document replaces the metadata title.
+\f[CR]--shift-heading-level-by=-1\f[R] is a good choice when converting
+HTML or Markdown documents that use an initial level-1 heading for the
+document title and level-2+ headings for sections.
+\f[CR]--shift-heading-level-by=1\f[R] may be a good choice for
+converting Markdown documents that use level-1 headings for sections to
+HTML, since pandoc uses a level-1 heading to render the document title.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--base-header-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[I]Deprecated.
+Use \f[CI]--shift-heading-level-by\f[I]=X instead, where X = NUMBER -
+1.\f[R] Specify the base level for headings (defaults to 1).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--indented-code-classes=\f[R]\f[I]CLASSES\f[R]
+Specify classes to use for indented code blocks\[en]for example,
+\f[CR]perl,numberLines\f[R] or \f[CR]haskell\f[R].
+Multiple classes may be separated by spaces or commas.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--default-image-extension=\f[R]\f[I]EXTENSION\f[R]
+Specify a default extension to use when image paths/URLs have no
+extension.
+This allows you to use the same source for formats that require
+different kinds of images.
+Currently this option only affects the Markdown and LaTeX readers.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--file-scope[=true|false]\f[R]
+Parse each file individually before combining for multifile documents.
+This will allow footnotes in different files with the same identifiers
+to work as expected.
+If this option is set, footnotes and links will not work across files.
+Reading binary files (docx, odt, epub) implies \f[CR]--file-scope\f[R].
+.RS
+.PP
+If two or more files are processed using \f[CR]--file-scope\f[R],
+prefixes based on the filenames will be added to identifiers in order to
+disambiguate them, and internal links will be adjusted accordingly.
+For example, a header with identifier \f[CR]foo\f[R] in
+\f[CR]subdir/file1.txt\f[R] will have its identifier changed to
+\f[CR]subdir__file1.txt__foo\f[R].
+.PP
+In addition, a Div with an identifier based on the filename will be
+added around the file\[cq]s content, so that internal links to the
+filename will point to this Div\[cq]s identifier.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]-F\f[R] \f[I]PROGRAM\f[R], \f[CR]--filter=\f[R]\f[I]PROGRAM\f[R]
+Specify an executable to be used as a filter transforming the pandoc AST
+after the input is parsed and before the output is written.
+The executable should read JSON from stdin and write JSON to stdout.
+The JSON must be formatted like pandoc\[cq]s own JSON input and output.
+The name of the output format will be passed to the filter as the first
+argument.
+Hence,
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --filter ./caps.py -t latex
+.EE
+.PP
+is equivalent to
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -t json | ./caps.py latex | pandoc -f json -t latex
+.EE
+.PP
+The latter form may be useful for debugging filters.
+.PP
+Filters may be written in any language.
+\f[CR]Text.Pandoc.JSON\f[R] exports \f[CR]toJSONFilter\f[R] to
+facilitate writing filters in Haskell.
+Those who would prefer to write filters in python can use the module
+\f[CR]pandocfilters\f[R], installable from PyPI.
+There are also pandoc filter libraries in PHP, perl, and
+JavaScript/node.js.
+.PP
+In order of preference, pandoc will look for filters in
+.IP "1." 3
+a specified full or relative path (executable or non-executable),
+.IP "2." 3
+\f[CR]$DATADIR/filters\f[R] (executable or non-executable) where
+\f[CR]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R], above),
+.IP "3." 3
+\f[CR]$PATH\f[R] (executable only).
+.PP
+Filters, Lua-filters, and citeproc processing are applied in the order
+specified on the command line.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]-L\f[R] \f[I]SCRIPT\f[R], \f[CR]--lua-filter=\f[R]\f[I]SCRIPT\f[R]
+Transform the document in a similar fashion as JSON filters (see
+\f[CR]--filter\f[R]), but use pandoc\[cq]s built-in Lua filtering
+system.
+The given Lua script is expected to return a list of Lua filters which
+will be applied in order.
+Each Lua filter must contain element-transforming functions indexed by
+the name of the AST element on which the filter function should be
+applied.
+.RS
+.PP
+The \f[CR]pandoc\f[R] Lua module provides helper functions for element
+creation.
+It is always loaded into the script\[cq]s Lua environment.
+.PP
+See the Lua filters documentation for further details.
+.PP
+In order of preference, pandoc will look for Lua filters in
+.IP "1." 3
+a specified full or relative path,
+.IP "2." 3
+\f[CR]$DATADIR/filters\f[R] where \f[CR]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data
+directory (see \f[CR]--data-dir\f[R], above).
+.PP
+Filters, Lua filters, and citeproc processing are applied in the order
+specified on the command line.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]-M\f[R] \f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[CR]=\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]], \f[CR]--metadata=\f[R]\f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[CR]:\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]]
+Set the metadata field \f[I]KEY\f[R] to the value \f[I]VAL\f[R].
+A value specified on the command line overrides a value specified in the
+document using YAML metadata blocks.
+Values will be parsed as YAML boolean or string values.
+If no value is specified, the value will be treated as Boolean true.
+Like \f[CR]--variable\f[R], \f[CR]--metadata\f[R] causes template
+variables to be set.
+But unlike \f[CR]--variable\f[R], \f[CR]--metadata\f[R] affects the
+metadata of the underlying document (which is accessible from filters
+and may be printed in some output formats) and metadata values will be
+escaped when inserted into the template.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--metadata-file=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Read metadata from the supplied YAML (or JSON) file.
+This option can be used with every input format, but string scalars in
+the metadata file will always be parsed as Markdown.
+(If the input format is Markdown or a Markdown variant, then the same
+variant will be used to parse the metadata file; if it is a non-Markdown
+format, pandoc\[cq]s default Markdown extensions will be used.)
+This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple metadata files;
+values in files specified later on the command line will be preferred
+over those specified in earlier files.
+Metadata values specified inside the document, or by using
+\f[CR]-M\f[R], overwrite values specified with this option.
+The file will be searched for first in the working directory, and then
+in the \f[CR]metadata\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]-p\f[R], \f[CR]--preserve-tabs[=true|false]\f[R]
+Preserve tabs instead of converting them to spaces.
+(By default, pandoc converts tabs to spaces before parsing its input.)
+Note that this will only affect tabs in literal code spans and code
+blocks.
+Tabs in regular text are always treated as spaces.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--tab-stop=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Specify the number of spaces per tab (default is 4).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--track-changes=accept\f[R]|\f[CR]reject\f[R]|\f[CR]all\f[R]
+Specifies what to do with insertions, deletions, and comments produced
+by the MS Word \[lq]Track Changes\[rq] feature.
+\f[CR]accept\f[R] (the default) processes all the insertions and
+deletions.
+\f[CR]reject\f[R] ignores them.
+Both \f[CR]accept\f[R] and \f[CR]reject\f[R] ignore comments.
+\f[CR]all\f[R] includes all insertions, deletions, and comments, wrapped
+in spans with \f[CR]insertion\f[R], \f[CR]deletion\f[R],
+\f[CR]comment-start\f[R], and \f[CR]comment-end\f[R] classes,
+respectively.
+The author and time of change is included.
+\f[CR]all\f[R] is useful for scripting: only accepting changes from a
+certain reviewer, say, or before a certain date.
+If a paragraph is inserted or deleted, \f[CR]track-changes=all\f[R]
+produces a span with the class
+\f[CR]paragraph-insertion\f[R]/\f[CR]paragraph-deletion\f[R] before the
+affected paragraph break.
+This option only affects the docx reader.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--extract-media=\f[R]\f[I]DIR\f[R]
+Extract images and other media contained in or linked from the source
+document to the path \f[I]DIR\f[R], creating it if necessary, and adjust
+the images references in the document so they point to the extracted
+files.
+Media are downloaded, read from the file system, or extracted from a
+binary container (e.g.\ docx), as needed.
+The original file paths are used if they are relative paths not
+containing \f[CR]..\f[R].
+Otherwise filenames are constructed from the SHA1 hash of the contents.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--abbreviations=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Specifies a custom abbreviations file, with abbreviations one to a line.
+If this option is not specified, pandoc will read the data file
+\f[CR]abbreviations\f[R] from the user data directory or fall back on a
+system default.
+To see the system default, use
+\f[CR]pandoc --print-default-data-file=abbreviations\f[R].
+The only use pandoc makes of this list is in the Markdown reader.
+Strings found in this list will be followed by a nonbreaking space, and
+the period will not produce sentence-ending space in formats like LaTeX.
+The strings may not contain spaces.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--trace[=true|false]\f[R]
+Print diagnostic output tracing parser progress to stderr.
+This option is intended for use by developers in diagnosing performance
+issues.
+.SS General writer options
+.TP
+\f[CR]-s\f[R], \f[CR]--standalone\f[R]
+Produce output with an appropriate header and footer (e.g.\ a standalone
+HTML, LaTeX, TEI, or RTF file, not a fragment).
+This option is set automatically for \f[CR]pdf\f[R], \f[CR]epub\f[R],
+\f[CR]epub3\f[R], \f[CR]fb2\f[R], \f[CR]docx\f[R], and \f[CR]odt\f[R]
+output.
+For \f[CR]native\f[R] output, this option causes metadata to be
+included; otherwise, metadata is suppressed.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--template=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+Use the specified file as a custom template for the generated document.
+Implies \f[CR]--standalone\f[R].
+See Templates, below, for a description of template syntax.
+If no extension is specified, an extension corresponding to the writer
+will be added, so that \f[CR]--template=special\f[R] looks for
+\f[CR]special.html\f[R] for HTML output.
+If the template is not found, pandoc will search for it in the
+\f[CR]templates\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+If this option is not used, a default template appropriate for the
+output format will be used (see \f[CR]-D/--print-default-template\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]-V\f[R] \f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[CR]=\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]], \f[CR]--variable=\f[R]\f[I]KEY\f[R][\f[CR]:\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]]
+Set the template variable \f[I]KEY\f[R] to the value \f[I]VAL\f[R] when
+rendering the document in standalone mode.
+If no \f[I]VAL\f[R] is specified, the key will be given the value
+\f[CR]true\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--sandbox[=true|false]\f[R]
+Run pandoc in a sandbox, limiting IO operations in readers and writers
+to reading the files specified on the command line.
+Note that this option does not limit IO operations by filters or in the
+production of PDF documents.
+But it does offer security against, for example, disclosure of files
+through the use of \f[CR]include\f[R] directives.
+Anyone using pandoc on untrusted user input should use this option.
+.RS
+.PP
+Note: some readers and writers (e.g., \f[CR]docx\f[R]) need access to
+data files.
+If these are stored on the file system, then pandoc will not be able to
+find them when run in \f[CR]--sandbox\f[R] mode and will raise an error.
+For these applications, we recommend using a pandoc binary compiled with
+the \f[CR]embed_data_files\f[R] option, which causes the data files to
+be baked into the binary instead of being stored on the file system.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]-D\f[R] \f[I]FORMAT\f[R], \f[CR]--print-default-template=\f[R]\f[I]FORMAT\f[R]
+Print the system default template for an output \f[I]FORMAT\f[R].
+(See \f[CR]-t\f[R] for a list of possible \f[I]FORMAT\f[R]s.)
+Templates in the user data directory are ignored.
+This option may be used with \f[CR]-o\f[R]/\f[CR]--output\f[R] to
+redirect output to a file, but \f[CR]-o\f[R]/\f[CR]--output\f[R] must
+come before \f[CR]--print-default-template\f[R] on the command line.
+.RS
+.PP
+Note that some of the default templates use partials, for example
+\f[CR]styles.html\f[R].
+To print the partials, use \f[CR]--print-default-data-file\f[R]: for
+example, \f[CR]--print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html\f[R].
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--print-default-data-file=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Print a system default data file.
+Files in the user data directory are ignored.
+This option may be used with \f[CR]-o\f[R]/\f[CR]--output\f[R] to
+redirect output to a file, but \f[CR]-o\f[R]/\f[CR]--output\f[R] must
+come before \f[CR]--print-default-data-file\f[R] on the command line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--eol=crlf\f[R]|\f[CR]lf\f[R]|\f[CR]native\f[R]
+Manually specify line endings: \f[CR]crlf\f[R] (Windows), \f[CR]lf\f[R]
+(macOS/Linux/UNIX), or \f[CR]native\f[R] (line endings appropriate to
+the OS on which pandoc is being run).
+The default is \f[CR]native\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--dpi\f[R]=\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Specify the default dpi (dots per inch) value for conversion from pixels
+to inch/centimeters and vice versa.
+(Technically, the correct term would be ppi: pixels per inch.)
+The default is 96dpi.
+When images contain information about dpi internally, the encoded value
+is used instead of the default specified by this option.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--wrap=auto\f[R]|\f[CR]none\f[R]|\f[CR]preserve\f[R]
+Determine how text is wrapped in the output (the source code, not the
+rendered version).
+With \f[CR]auto\f[R] (the default), pandoc will attempt to wrap lines to
+the column width specified by \f[CR]--columns\f[R] (default 72).
+With \f[CR]none\f[R], pandoc will not wrap lines at all.
+With \f[CR]preserve\f[R], pandoc will attempt to preserve the wrapping
+from the source document (that is, where there are nonsemantic newlines
+in the source, there will be nonsemantic newlines in the output as
+well).
+In \f[CR]ipynb\f[R] output, this option affects wrapping of the contents
+of markdown cells.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--columns=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Specify length of lines in characters.
+This affects text wrapping in the generated source code (see
+\f[CR]--wrap\f[R]).
+It also affects calculation of column widths for plain text tables (see
+Tables below).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--toc[=true|false]\f[R], \f[CR]--table-of-contents[=true|false]\f[R]
+Include an automatically generated table of contents (or, in the case of
+\f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]context\f[R], \f[CR]docx\f[R], \f[CR]odt\f[R],
+\f[CR]opendocument\f[R], \f[CR]rst\f[R], or \f[CR]ms\f[R], an
+instruction to create one) in the output document.
+This option has no effect unless \f[CR]-s/--standalone\f[R] is used, and
+it has no effect on \f[CR]man\f[R], \f[CR]docbook4\f[R],
+\f[CR]docbook5\f[R], or \f[CR]jats\f[R] output.
+.RS
+.PP
+Note that if you are producing a PDF via \f[CR]ms\f[R], the table of
+contents will appear at the beginning of the document, before the title.
+If you would prefer it to be at the end of the document, use the option
+\f[CR]--pdf-engine-opt=--no-toc-relocation\f[R].
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--toc-depth=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Specify the number of section levels to include in the table of
+contents.
+The default is 3 (which means that level-1, 2, and 3 headings will be
+listed in the contents).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--strip-comments[=true|false]\f[R]
+Strip out HTML comments in the Markdown or Textile source, rather than
+passing them on to Markdown, Textile or HTML output as raw HTML.
+This does not apply to HTML comments inside raw HTML blocks when the
+\f[CR]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R] extension is not set.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--no-highlight\f[R]
+Disables syntax highlighting for code blocks and inlines, even when a
+language attribute is given.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--highlight-style=\f[R]\f[I]STYLE\f[R]|\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Specifies the coloring style to be used in highlighted source code.
+Options are \f[CR]pygments\f[R] (the default), \f[CR]kate\f[R],
+\f[CR]monochrome\f[R], \f[CR]breezeDark\f[R], \f[CR]espresso\f[R],
+\f[CR]zenburn\f[R], \f[CR]haddock\f[R], and \f[CR]tango\f[R].
+For more information on syntax highlighting in pandoc, see Syntax
+highlighting, below.
+See also \f[CR]--list-highlight-styles\f[R].
+.RS
+.PP
+Instead of a \f[I]STYLE\f[R] name, a JSON file with extension
+\f[CR].theme\f[R] may be supplied.
+This will be parsed as a KDE syntax highlighting theme and (if valid)
+used as the highlighting style.
+.PP
+To generate the JSON version of an existing style, use
+\f[CR]--print-highlight-style\f[R].
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--print-highlight-style=\f[R]\f[I]STYLE\f[R]|\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Prints a JSON version of a highlighting style, which can be modified,
+saved with a \f[CR].theme\f[R] extension, and used with
+\f[CR]--highlight-style\f[R].
+This option may be used with \f[CR]-o\f[R]/\f[CR]--output\f[R] to
+redirect output to a file, but \f[CR]-o\f[R]/\f[CR]--output\f[R] must
+come before \f[CR]--print-highlight-style\f[R] on the command line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--syntax-definition=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Instructs pandoc to load a KDE XML syntax definition file, which will be
+used for syntax highlighting of appropriately marked code blocks.
+This can be used to add support for new languages or to use altered
+syntax definitions for existing languages.
+This option may be repeated to add multiple syntax definitions.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-H\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[CR]--include-in-header=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+Include contents of \f[I]FILE\f[R], verbatim, at the end of the header.
+This can be used, for example, to include special CSS or JavaScript in
+HTML documents.
+This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files in the
+header.
+They will be included in the order specified.
+Implies \f[CR]--standalone\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-B\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[CR]--include-before-body=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+Include contents of \f[I]FILE\f[R], verbatim, at the beginning of the
+document body (e.g.\ after the \f[CR]<body>\f[R] tag in HTML, or the
+\f[CR]\[rs]begin{document}\f[R] command in LaTeX).
+This can be used to include navigation bars or banners in HTML
+documents.
+This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files.
+They will be included in the order specified.
+Implies \f[CR]--standalone\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-A\f[R] \f[I]FILE\f[R], \f[CR]--include-after-body=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+Include contents of \f[I]FILE\f[R], verbatim, at the end of the document
+body (before the \f[CR]</body>\f[R] tag in HTML, or the
+\f[CR]\[rs]end{document}\f[R] command in LaTeX).
+This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files.
+They will be included in the order specified.
+Implies \f[CR]--standalone\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--resource-path=\f[R]\f[I]SEARCHPATH\f[R]
+List of paths to search for images and other resources.
+The paths should be separated by \f[CR]:\f[R] on Linux, UNIX, and macOS
+systems, and by \f[CR];\f[R] on Windows.
+If \f[CR]--resource-path\f[R] is not specified, the default resource
+path is the working directory.
+Note that, if \f[CR]--resource-path\f[R] is specified, the working
+directory must be explicitly listed or it will not be searched.
+For example: \f[CR]--resource-path=.:test\f[R] will search the working
+directory and the \f[CR]test\f[R] subdirectory, in that order.
+This option can be used repeatedly.
+Search path components that come later on the command line will be
+searched before those that come earlier, so
+\f[CR]--resource-path foo:bar --resource-path baz:bim\f[R] is equivalent
+to \f[CR]--resource-path baz:bim:foo:bar\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--request-header=\f[R]\f[I]NAME\f[R]\f[CR]:\f[R]\f[I]VAL\f[R]
+Set the request header \f[I]NAME\f[R] to the value \f[I]VAL\f[R] when
+making HTTP requests (for example, when a URL is given on the command
+line, or when resources used in a document must be downloaded).
+If you\[cq]re behind a proxy, you also need to set the environment
+variable \f[CR]http_proxy\f[R] to \f[CR]http://...\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--no-check-certificate[=true|false]\f[R]
+Disable the certificate verification to allow access to unsecure HTTP
+resources (for example when the certificate is no longer valid or self
+signed).
+.SS Options affecting specific writers
+.TP
+\f[CR]--self-contained[=true|false]\f[R]
+\f[I]Deprecated synonym for
+\f[CI]--embed-resources --standalone\f[I].\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]--embed-resources[=true|false]\f[R]
+Produce a standalone HTML file with no external dependencies, using
+\f[CR]data:\f[R] URIs to incorporate the contents of linked scripts,
+stylesheets, images, and videos.
+The resulting file should be \[lq]self-contained,\[rq] in the sense that
+it needs no external files and no net access to be displayed properly by
+a browser.
+This option works only with HTML output formats, including
+\f[CR]html4\f[R], \f[CR]html5\f[R], \f[CR]html+lhs\f[R],
+\f[CR]html5+lhs\f[R], \f[CR]s5\f[R], \f[CR]slidy\f[R],
+\f[CR]slideous\f[R], \f[CR]dzslides\f[R], and \f[CR]revealjs\f[R].
+Scripts, images, and stylesheets at absolute URLs will be downloaded;
+those at relative URLs will be sought relative to the working directory
+(if the first source file is local) or relative to the base URL (if the
+first source file is remote).
+Elements with the attribute \f[CR]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] will be
+left alone; the documents they link to will not be incorporated in the
+document.
+Limitation: resources that are loaded dynamically through JavaScript
+cannot be incorporated; as a result, fonts may be missing when
+\f[CR]--mathjax\f[R] is used, and some advanced features (e.g.\ zoom or
+speaker notes) may not work in an offline \[lq]self-contained\[rq]
+\f[CR]reveal.js\f[R] slide show.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--html-q-tags[=true|false]\f[R]
+Use \f[CR]<q>\f[R] tags for quotes in HTML.
+(This option only has an effect if the \f[CR]smart\f[R] extension is
+enabled for the input format used.)
+.TP
+\f[CR]--ascii[=true|false]\f[R]
+Use only ASCII characters in output.
+Currently supported for XML and HTML formats (which use entities instead
+of UTF-8 when this option is selected), CommonMark, gfm, and Markdown
+(which use entities), roff man and ms (which use hexadecimal escapes),
+and to a limited degree LaTeX (which uses standard commands for accented
+characters when possible).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--reference-links[=true|false]\f[R]
+Use reference-style links, rather than inline links, in writing Markdown
+or reStructuredText.
+By default inline links are used.
+The placement of link references is affected by the
+\f[CR]--reference-location\f[R] option.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--reference-location=block\f[R]|\f[CR]section\f[R]|\f[CR]document\f[R]
+Specify whether footnotes (and references, if \f[CR]reference-links\f[R]
+is set) are placed at the end of the current (top-level) block, the
+current section, or the document.
+The default is \f[CR]document\f[R].
+Currently this option only affects the \f[CR]markdown\f[R],
+\f[CR]muse\f[R], \f[CR]html\f[R], \f[CR]epub\f[R], \f[CR]slidy\f[R],
+\f[CR]s5\f[R], \f[CR]slideous\f[R], \f[CR]dzslides\f[R], and
+\f[CR]revealjs\f[R] writers.
+In slide formats, specifying \f[CR]--reference-location=section\f[R]
+will cause notes to be rendered at the bottom of a slide.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--markdown-headings=setext\f[R]|\f[CR]atx\f[R]
+Specify whether to use ATX-style (\f[CR]#\f[R]-prefixed) or Setext-style
+(underlined) headings for level 1 and 2 headings in Markdown output.
+(The default is \f[CR]atx\f[R].)
+ATX-style headings are always used for levels 3+.
+This option also affects Markdown cells in \f[CR]ipynb\f[R] output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--list-tables[=true|false]\f[R]
+Render tables as list tables in RST output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--top-level-division=default\f[R]|\f[CR]section\f[R]|\f[CR]chapter\f[R]|\f[CR]part\f[R]
+Treat top-level headings as the given division type in LaTeX, ConTeXt,
+DocBook, and TEI output.
+The hierarchy order is part, chapter, then section; all headings are
+shifted such that the top-level heading becomes the specified type.
+The default behavior is to determine the best division type via
+heuristics: unless other conditions apply, \f[CR]section\f[R] is chosen.
+When the \f[CR]documentclass\f[R] variable is set to \f[CR]report\f[R],
+\f[CR]book\f[R], or \f[CR]memoir\f[R] (unless the \f[CR]article\f[R]
+option is specified), \f[CR]chapter\f[R] is implied as the setting for
+this option.
+If \f[CR]beamer\f[R] is the output format, specifying either
+\f[CR]chapter\f[R] or \f[CR]part\f[R] will cause top-level headings to
+become \f[CR]\[rs]part{..}\f[R], while second-level headings remain as
+their default type.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-N\f[R], \f[CR]--number-sections\f[R]
+Number section headings in LaTeX, ConTeXt, HTML, Docx, ms, or EPUB
+output.
+By default, sections are not numbered.
+Sections with class \f[CR]unnumbered\f[R] will never be numbered, even
+if \f[CR]--number-sections\f[R] is specified.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--number-offset=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R][\f[CR],\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]\f[CR],\f[R]\f[I]\&...\f[R]]
+Offset for section headings in HTML output (ignored in other output
+formats).
+The first number is added to the section number for top-level headings,
+the second for second-level headings, and so on.
+So, for example, if you want the first top-level heading in your
+document to be numbered \[lq]6\[rq], specify
+\f[CR]--number-offset=5\f[R].
+If your document starts with a level-2 heading which you want to be
+numbered \[lq]1.5\[rq], specify \f[CR]--number-offset=1,4\f[R].
+Offsets are 0 by default.
+Implies \f[CR]--number-sections\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--listings[=true|false]\f[R]
+Use the \f[CR]listings\f[R] package for LaTeX code blocks.
+The package does not support multi-byte encoding for source code.
+To handle UTF-8 you would need to use a custom template.
+This issue is fully documented here: Encoding issue with the listings
+package.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-i\f[R], \f[CR]--incremental[=true|false]\f[R]
+Make list items in slide shows display incrementally (one by one).
+The default is for lists to be displayed all at once.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--slide-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Specifies that headings with the specified level create slides (for
+\f[CR]beamer\f[R], \f[CR]s5\f[R], \f[CR]slidy\f[R], \f[CR]slideous\f[R],
+\f[CR]dzslides\f[R]).
+Headings above this level in the hierarchy are used to divide the slide
+show into sections; headings below this level create subheads within a
+slide.
+Valid values are 0-6.
+If a slide level of 0 is specified, slides will not be split
+automatically on headings, and horizontal rules must be used to indicate
+slide boundaries.
+If a slide level is not specified explicitly, the slide level will be
+set automatically based on the contents of the document; see Structuring
+the slide show.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--section-divs[=true|false]\f[R]
+Wrap sections in \f[CR]<section>\f[R] tags (or \f[CR]<div>\f[R] tags for
+\f[CR]html4\f[R]), and attach identifiers to the enclosing
+\f[CR]<section>\f[R] (or \f[CR]<div>\f[R]) rather than the heading
+itself (see Heading identifiers, below).
+This option only affects HTML output (and does not affect HTML slide
+formats).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--email-obfuscation=none\f[R]|\f[CR]javascript\f[R]|\f[CR]references\f[R]
+Specify a method for obfuscating \f[CR]mailto:\f[R] links in HTML
+documents.
+\f[CR]none\f[R] leaves \f[CR]mailto:\f[R] links as they are.
+\f[CR]javascript\f[R] obfuscates them using JavaScript.
+\f[CR]references\f[R] obfuscates them by printing their letters as
+decimal or hexadecimal character references.
+The default is \f[CR]none\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--id-prefix=\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
+Specify a prefix to be added to all identifiers and internal links in
+HTML and DocBook output, and to footnote numbers in Markdown and Haddock
+output.
+This is useful for preventing duplicate identifiers when generating
+fragments to be included in other pages.
+.TP
+\f[CR]-T\f[R] \f[I]STRING\f[R], \f[CR]--title-prefix=\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
+Specify \f[I]STRING\f[R] as a prefix at the beginning of the title that
+appears in the HTML header (but not in the title as it appears at the
+beginning of the HTML body).
+Implies \f[CR]--standalone\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]-c\f[R] \f[I]URL\f[R], \f[CR]--css=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]
+Link to a CSS style sheet.
+This option can be used repeatedly to include multiple files.
+They will be included in the order specified.
+This option only affects HTML (including HTML slide shows) and EPUB
+output.
+It should be used together with \f[CR]-s/--standalone\f[R], because the
+link to the stylesheet goes in the document header.
+.RS
+.PP
+A stylesheet is required for generating EPUB.
+If none is provided using this option (or the \f[CR]css\f[R] or
+\f[CR]stylesheet\f[R] metadata fields), pandoc will look for a file
+\f[CR]epub.css\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+If it is not found there, sensible defaults will be used.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--reference-doc=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]|\f[I]URL\f[R]
+Use the specified file as a style reference in producing a docx or ODT
+file.
+.RS
+.TP
+Docx
+For best results, the reference docx should be a modified version of a
+docx file produced using pandoc.
+The contents of the reference docx are ignored, but its stylesheets and
+document properties (including margins, page size, header, and footer)
+are used in the new docx.
+If no reference docx is specified on the command line, pandoc will look
+for a file \f[CR]reference.docx\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+If this is not found either, sensible defaults will be used.
+.RS
+.PP
+To produce a custom \f[CR]reference.docx\f[R], first get a copy of the
+default \f[CR]reference.docx\f[R]:
+\f[CR]pandoc -o custom-reference.docx --print-default-data-file reference.docx\f[R].
+Then open \f[CR]custom-reference.docx\f[R] in Word, modify the styles as
+you wish, and save the file.
+For best results, do not make changes to this file other than modifying
+the styles used by pandoc:
+.PP
+Paragraph styles:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Normal
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Body Text
+.IP \[bu] 2
+First Paragraph
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Compact
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Title
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Subtitle
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Author
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Date
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Abstract
+.IP \[bu] 2
+AbstractTitle
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Bibliography
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 1
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 2
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 3
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 4
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 5
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 6
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 7
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 8
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Heading 9
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Block Text [for block quotes]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Footnote Block Text [for block quotes in footnotes]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Source Code
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Footnote Text
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Definition Term
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Definition
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Caption
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Table Caption
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Image Caption
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Figure
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Captioned Figure
+.IP \[bu] 2
+TOC Heading
+.PP
+Character styles:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Default Paragraph Font
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Body Text Char
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Verbatim Char
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Footnote Reference
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Hyperlink
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Section Number
+.PP
+Table style:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Table
+.RE
+.TP
+ODT
+For best results, the reference ODT should be a modified version of an
+ODT produced using pandoc.
+The contents of the reference ODT are ignored, but its stylesheets are
+used in the new ODT.
+If no reference ODT is specified on the command line, pandoc will look
+for a file \f[CR]reference.odt\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+If this is not found either, sensible defaults will be used.
+.RS
+.PP
+To produce a custom \f[CR]reference.odt\f[R], first get a copy of the
+default \f[CR]reference.odt\f[R]:
+\f[CR]pandoc -o custom-reference.odt --print-default-data-file reference.odt\f[R].
+Then open \f[CR]custom-reference.odt\f[R] in LibreOffice, modify the
+styles as you wish, and save the file.
+.RE
+.TP
+PowerPoint
+Templates included with Microsoft PowerPoint 2013 (either with
+\f[CR].pptx\f[R] or \f[CR].potx\f[R] extension) are known to work, as
+are most templates derived from these.
+.RS
+.PP
+The specific requirement is that the template should contain layouts
+with the following names (as seen within PowerPoint):
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Title Slide
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Title and Content
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Section Header
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Two Content
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Comparison
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Content with Caption
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Blank
+.PP
+For each name, the first layout found with that name will be used.
+If no layout is found with one of the names, pandoc will output a
+warning and use the layout with that name from the default reference doc
+instead.
+(How these layouts are used is described in PowerPoint layout choice.)
+.PP
+All templates included with a recent version of MS PowerPoint will fit
+these criteria.
+(You can click on \f[CR]Layout\f[R] under the \f[CR]Home\f[R] menu to
+check.)
+.PP
+You can also modify the default \f[CR]reference.pptx\f[R]: first run
+\f[CR]pandoc -o custom-reference.pptx --print-default-data-file reference.pptx\f[R],
+and then modify \f[CR]custom-reference.pptx\f[R] in MS PowerPoint
+(pandoc will use the layouts with the names listed above).
+.RE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--split-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+Specify the heading level at which to split an EPUB or chunked HTML
+document into separate files.
+The default is to split into chapters at level-1 headings.
+In the case of EPUB, this option only affects the internal composition
+of the EPUB, not the way chapters and sections are displayed to users.
+Some readers may be slow if the chapter files are too large, so for
+large documents with few level-1 headings, one might want to use a
+chapter level of 2 or 3.
+For chunked HTML, this option determines how much content goes in each
+\[lq]chunk.\[rq]
+.TP
+\f[CR]--chunk-template=\f[R]\f[I]PATHTEMPLATE\f[R]
+Specify a template for the filenames in a \f[CR]chunkedhtml\f[R]
+document.
+In the template, \f[CR]%n\f[R] will be replaced by the chunk number
+(padded with leading 0s to 3 digits), \f[CR]%s\f[R] with the section
+number of the chunk, \f[CR]%h\f[R] with the heading text (with
+formatting removed), \f[CR]%i\f[R] with the section identifier.
+For example, \f[CR]%section-%s-%i.html\f[R] might be resolved to
+\f[CR]section-1.1-introduction.html\f[R].
+The characters \f[CR]/\f[R] and \f[CR]\[rs]\f[R] are not allowed in
+chunk templates and will be ignored.
+The default is \f[CR]%s-%i.html\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--epub-chapter-level=\f[R]\f[I]NUMBER\f[R]
+\f[I]Deprecated synonym for \f[CI]--split-level\f[I].\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]--epub-cover-image=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Use the specified image as the EPUB cover.
+It is recommended that the image be less than 1000px in width and
+height.
+Note that in a Markdown source document you can also specify
+\f[CR]cover-image\f[R] in a YAML metadata block (see EPUB Metadata,
+below).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--epub-title-page=true\f[R]|\f[CR]false\f[R]
+Determines whether a the title page is included in the EPUB (default is
+\f[CR]true\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--epub-metadata=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Look in the specified XML file for metadata for the EPUB.
+The file should contain a series of Dublin Core elements.
+For example:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+ <dc:rights>Creative Commons</dc:rights>
+ <dc:language>es-AR</dc:language>
+.EE
+.PP
+By default, pandoc will include the following metadata elements:
+\f[CR]<dc:title>\f[R] (from the document title), \f[CR]<dc:creator>\f[R]
+(from the document authors), \f[CR]<dc:date>\f[R] (from the document
+date, which should be in ISO 8601 format), \f[CR]<dc:language>\f[R]
+(from the \f[CR]lang\f[R] variable, or, if is not set, the locale), and
+\f[CR]<dc:identifier id=\[dq]BookId\[dq]>\f[R] (a randomly generated
+UUID).
+Any of these may be overridden by elements in the metadata file.
+.PP
+Note: if the source document is Markdown, a YAML metadata block in the
+document can be used instead.
+See below under EPUB Metadata.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--epub-embed-font=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Embed the specified font in the EPUB.
+This option can be repeated to embed multiple fonts.
+Wildcards can also be used: for example, \f[CR]DejaVuSans-*.ttf\f[R].
+However, if you use wildcards on the command line, be sure to escape
+them or put the whole filename in single quotes, to prevent them from
+being interpreted by the shell.
+To use the embedded fonts, you will need to add declarations like the
+following to your CSS (see \f[CR]--css\f[R]):
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+\[at]font-face {
+   font-family: DejaVuSans;
+   font-style: normal;
+   font-weight: normal;
+   src:url(\[dq]../fonts/DejaVuSans-Regular.ttf\[dq]);
+}
+\[at]font-face {
+   font-family: DejaVuSans;
+   font-style: normal;
+   font-weight: bold;
+   src:url(\[dq]../fonts/DejaVuSans-Bold.ttf\[dq]);
+}
+\[at]font-face {
+   font-family: DejaVuSans;
+   font-style: italic;
+   font-weight: normal;
+   src:url(\[dq]../fonts/DejaVuSans-Oblique.ttf\[dq]);
+}
+\[at]font-face {
+   font-family: DejaVuSans;
+   font-style: italic;
+   font-weight: bold;
+   src:url(\[dq]../fonts/DejaVuSans-BoldOblique.ttf\[dq]);
+}
+body { font-family: \[dq]DejaVuSans\[dq]; }
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--epub-subdirectory=\f[R]\f[I]DIRNAME\f[R]
+Specify the subdirectory in the OCF container that is to hold the
+EPUB-specific contents.
+The default is \f[CR]EPUB\f[R].
+To put the EPUB contents in the top level, use an empty string.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--ipynb-output=all|none|best\f[R]
+Determines how ipynb output cells are treated.
+\f[CR]all\f[R] means that all of the data formats included in the
+original are preserved.
+\f[CR]none\f[R] means that the contents of data cells are omitted.
+\f[CR]best\f[R] causes pandoc to try to pick the richest data block in
+each output cell that is compatible with the output format.
+The default is \f[CR]best\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--pdf-engine=\f[R]\f[I]PROGRAM\f[R]
+Use the specified engine when producing PDF output.
+Valid values are \f[CR]pdflatex\f[R], \f[CR]lualatex\f[R],
+\f[CR]xelatex\f[R], \f[CR]latexmk\f[R], \f[CR]tectonic\f[R],
+\f[CR]wkhtmltopdf\f[R], \f[CR]weasyprint\f[R], \f[CR]pagedjs-cli\f[R],
+\f[CR]prince\f[R], \f[CR]context\f[R], \f[CR]pdfroff\f[R], and
+\f[CR]typst\f[R].
+If the engine is not in your PATH, the full path of the engine may be
+specified here.
+If this option is not specified, pandoc uses the following defaults
+depending on the output format specified using \f[CR]-t/--to\f[R]:
+.RS
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]-t latex\f[R] or none: \f[CR]pdflatex\f[R] (other options:
+\f[CR]xelatex\f[R], \f[CR]lualatex\f[R], \f[CR]tectonic\f[R],
+\f[CR]latexmk\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]-t context\f[R]: \f[CR]context\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]-t html\f[R]: \f[CR]wkhtmltopdf\f[R] (other options:
+\f[CR]prince\f[R], \f[CR]weasyprint\f[R], \f[CR]pagedjs-cli\f[R]; see
+print-css.rocks for a good introduction to PDF generation from HTML/CSS)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]-t ms\f[R]: \f[CR]pdfroff\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]-t typst\f[R]: \f[CR]typst\f[R]
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]--pdf-engine-opt=\f[R]\f[I]STRING\f[R]
+Use the given string as a command-line argument to the
+\f[CR]pdf-engine\f[R].
+For example, to use a persistent directory \f[CR]foo\f[R] for
+\f[CR]latexmk\f[R]\[cq]s auxiliary files, use
+\f[CR]--pdf-engine-opt=-outdir=foo\f[R].
+Note that no check for duplicate options is done.
+.SS Citation rendering
+.TP
+\f[CR]-C\f[R], \f[CR]--citeproc\f[R]
+Process the citations in the file, replacing them with rendered
+citations and adding a bibliography.
+Citation processing will not take place unless bibliographic data is
+supplied, either through an external file specified using the
+\f[CR]--bibliography\f[R] option or the \f[CR]bibliography\f[R] field in
+metadata, or via a \f[CR]references\f[R] section in metadata containing
+a list of citations in CSL YAML format with Markdown formatting.
+The style is controlled by a CSL stylesheet specified using the
+\f[CR]--csl\f[R] option or the \f[CR]csl\f[R] field in metadata.
+(If no stylesheet is specified, the \f[CR]chicago-author-date\f[R] style
+will be used by default.)
+The citation processing transformation may be applied before or after
+filters or Lua filters (see \f[CR]--filter\f[R],
+\f[CR]--lua-filter\f[R]): these transformations are applied in the order
+they appear on the command line.
+For more information, see the section on Citations.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--bibliography=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Set the \f[CR]bibliography\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s metadata to
+\f[I]FILE\f[R], overriding any value set in the metadata.
+If you supply this argument multiple times, each \f[I]FILE\f[R] will be
+added to bibliography.
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is not found relative to the working directory, it
+will be sought in the resource path (see \f[CR]--resource-path\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]--csl=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Set the \f[CR]csl\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s metadata to
+\f[I]FILE\f[R], overriding any value set in the metadata.
+(This is equivalent to \f[CR]--metadata csl=FILE\f[R].)
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is not found relative to the working directory, it
+will be sought in the resource path (see \f[CR]--resource-path\f[R]) and
+finally in the \f[CR]csl\f[R] subdirectory of the pandoc user data
+directory.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--citation-abbreviations=\f[R]\f[I]FILE\f[R]
+Set the \f[CR]citation-abbreviations\f[R] field in the document\[cq]s
+metadata to \f[I]FILE\f[R], overriding any value set in the metadata.
+(This is equivalent to
+\f[CR]--metadata citation-abbreviations=FILE\f[R].)
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is a URL, it will be fetched via HTTP.
+If \f[I]FILE\f[R] is not found relative to the working directory, it
+will be sought in the resource path (see \f[CR]--resource-path\f[R]) and
+finally in the \f[CR]csl\f[R] subdirectory of the pandoc user data
+directory.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--natbib\f[R]
+Use \f[CR]natbib\f[R] for citations in LaTeX output.
+This option is not for use with the \f[CR]--citeproc\f[R] option or with
+PDF output.
+It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed
+with \f[CR]bibtex\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]--biblatex\f[R]
+Use \f[CR]biblatex\f[R] for citations in LaTeX output.
+This option is not for use with the \f[CR]--citeproc\f[R] option or with
+PDF output.
+It is intended for use in producing a LaTeX file that can be processed
+with \f[CR]bibtex\f[R] or \f[CR]biber\f[R].
+.SS Math rendering in HTML
+The default is to render TeX math as far as possible using Unicode
+characters.
+Formulas are put inside a \f[CR]span\f[R] with
+\f[CR]class=\[dq]math\[dq]\f[R], so that they may be styled differently
+from the surrounding text if needed.
+However, this gives acceptable results only for basic math, usually you
+will want to use \f[CR]--mathjax\f[R] or another of the following
+options.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--mathjax\f[R][\f[CR]=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
+Use MathJax to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
+TeX math will be put between \f[CR]\[rs](...\[rs])\f[R] (for inline
+math) or \f[CR]\[rs][...\[rs]]\f[R] (for display math) and wrapped in
+\f[CR]<span>\f[R] tags with class \f[CR]math\f[R].
+Then the MathJax JavaScript will render it.
+The \f[I]URL\f[R] should point to the \f[CR]MathJax.js\f[R] load script.
+If a \f[I]URL\f[R] is not provided, a link to the Cloudflare CDN will be
+inserted.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--mathml\f[R]
+Convert TeX math to MathML (in \f[CR]epub3\f[R], \f[CR]docbook4\f[R],
+\f[CR]docbook5\f[R], \f[CR]jats\f[R], \f[CR]html4\f[R] and
+\f[CR]html5\f[R]).
+This is the default in \f[CR]odt\f[R] output.
+MathML is supported natively by the main web browsers and select e-book
+readers.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--webtex\f[R][\f[CR]=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
+Convert TeX formulas to \f[CR]<img>\f[R] tags that link to an external
+script that converts formulas to images.
+The formula will be URL-encoded and concatenated with the URL provided.
+For SVG images you can for example use
+\f[CR]--webtex https://latex.codecogs.com/svg.latex?\f[R].
+If no URL is specified, the CodeCogs URL generating PNGs will be used
+(\f[CR]https://latex.codecogs.com/png.latex?\f[R]).
+Note: the \f[CR]--webtex\f[R] option will affect Markdown output as well
+as HTML, which is useful if you\[cq]re targeting a version of Markdown
+without native math support.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--katex\f[R][\f[CR]=\f[R]\f[I]URL\f[R]]
+Use KaTeX to display embedded TeX math in HTML output.
+The \f[I]URL\f[R] is the base URL for the KaTeX library.
+That directory should contain a \f[CR]katex.min.js\f[R] and a
+\f[CR]katex.min.css\f[R] file.
+If a \f[I]URL\f[R] is not provided, a link to the KaTeX CDN will be
+inserted.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--gladtex\f[R]
+Enclose TeX math in \f[CR]<eq>\f[R] tags in HTML output.
+The resulting HTML can then be processed by GladTeX to produce SVG
+images of the typeset formulas and an HTML file with these images
+embedded.
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -s --gladtex input.md -o myfile.htex
+gladtex -d image_dir myfile.htex
+# produces myfile.html and images in image_dir
+.EE
+.RE
+.SS Options for wrapper scripts
+.TP
+\f[CR]--dump-args[=true|false]\f[R]
+Print information about command-line arguments to \f[I]stdout\f[R], then
+exit.
+This option is intended primarily for use in wrapper scripts.
+The first line of output contains the name of the output file specified
+with the \f[CR]-o\f[R] option, or \f[CR]-\f[R] (for \f[I]stdout\f[R]) if
+no output file was specified.
+The remaining lines contain the command-line arguments, one per line, in
+the order they appear.
+These do not include regular pandoc options and their arguments, but do
+include any options appearing after a \f[CR]--\f[R] separator at the end
+of the line.
+.TP
+\f[CR]--ignore-args[=true|false]\f[R]
+Ignore command-line arguments (for use in wrapper scripts).
+Regular pandoc options are not ignored.
+Thus, for example,
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --ignore-args -o foo.html -s foo.txt -- -e latin1
+.EE
+.PP
+is equivalent to
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -o foo.html -s
+.EE
+.RE
+.SH EXIT CODES
+If pandoc completes successfully, it will return exit code 0.
+Nonzero exit codes have the following meanings:
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+    Code Error
+  ------ -------------------------------------
+       1 PandocIOError
+       3 PandocFailOnWarningError
+       4 PandocAppError
+       5 PandocTemplateError
+       6 PandocOptionError
+      21 PandocUnknownReaderError
+      22 PandocUnknownWriterError
+      23 PandocUnsupportedExtensionError
+      24 PandocCiteprocError
+      25 PandocBibliographyError
+      31 PandocEpubSubdirectoryError
+      43 PandocPDFError
+      44 PandocXMLError
+      47 PandocPDFProgramNotFoundError
+      61 PandocHttpError
+      62 PandocShouldNeverHappenError
+      63 PandocSomeError
+      64 PandocParseError
+      66 PandocMakePDFError
+      67 PandocSyntaxMapError
+      83 PandocFilterError
+      84 PandocLuaError
+      89 PandocNoScriptingEngine
+      91 PandocMacroLoop
+      92 PandocUTF8DecodingError
+      93 PandocIpynbDecodingError
+      94 PandocUnsupportedCharsetError
+      97 PandocCouldNotFindDataFileError
+      98 PandocCouldNotFindMetadataFileError
+      99 PandocResourceNotFound
+.EE
+.RE
+.SH DEFAULTS FILES
+The \f[CR]--defaults\f[R] option may be used to specify a package of
+options, in the form of a YAML file.
+.PP
+Fields that are omitted will just have their regular default values.
+So a defaults file can be as simple as one line:
+.IP
+.EX
+verbosity: INFO
+.EE
+.PP
+In fields that expect a file path (or list of file paths), the following
+syntax may be used to interpolate environment variables:
+.IP
+.EX
+csl:  ${HOME}/mycsldir/special.csl
+.EE
+.PP
+\f[CR]${USERDATA}\f[R] may also be used; this will always resolve to the
+user data directory that is current when the defaults file is parsed,
+regardless of the setting of the environment variable
+\f[CR]USERDATA\f[R].
+.PP
+\f[CR]${.}\f[R] will resolve to the directory containing the defaults
+file itself.
+This allows you to refer to resources contained in that directory:
+.IP
+.EX
+epub-cover-image: ${.}/cover.jpg
+epub-metadata: ${.}/meta.xml
+resource-path:
+- .             # the working directory from which pandoc is run
+- ${.}/images   # the images subdirectory of the directory
+                # containing this defaults file
+.EE
+.PP
+This environment variable interpolation syntax \f[I]only\f[R] works in
+fields that expect file paths.
+.PP
+Defaults files can be placed in the \f[CR]defaults\f[R] subdirectory of
+the user data directory and used from any directory.
+For example, one could create a file specifying defaults for writing
+letters, save it as \f[CR]letter.yaml\f[R] in the \f[CR]defaults\f[R]
+subdirectory of the user data directory, and then invoke these defaults
+from any directory using \f[CR]pandoc --defaults letter\f[R] or
+\f[CR]pandoc -dletter\f[R].
+.PP
+When multiple defaults are used, their contents will be combined.
+.PP
+Note that, where command-line arguments may be repeated
+(\f[CR]--metadata-file\f[R], \f[CR]--css\f[R],
+\f[CR]--include-in-header\f[R], \f[CR]--include-before-body\f[R],
+\f[CR]--include-after-body\f[R], \f[CR]--variable\f[R],
+\f[CR]--metadata\f[R], \f[CR]--syntax-definition\f[R]), the values
+specified on the command line will combine with values specified in the
+defaults file, rather than replacing them.
+.PP
+The following tables show the mapping between the command line and
+defaults file entries.
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ foo.md                            input-file: foo.md            
+
+ foo.md bar.md                     input-files:                  
+                                     - foo.md                    
+                                     - bar.md                    
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+The value of \f[CR]input-files\f[R] may be left empty to indicate input
+from stdin, and it can be an empty sequence \f[CR][]\f[R] for no input.
+.SS General options
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --from markdown+emoji             from: markdown+emoji          
+                                                                 
+                                   reader: markdown+emoji        
+
+                                   to: markdown+hard_line_breaks 
+   --to markdown+hard_line_breaks                                    
+                                                                 
+                               writer: markdown+hard_line_breaks 
+
+ --output foo.pdf                  output-file: foo.pdf          
+
+ --output -                        output-file:                  
+
+ --data-dir dir                    data-dir: dir                 
+
+ --defaults file                   defaults:                     
+                                   - file                        
+
+ --verbose                         verbosity: INFO               
+
+ --quiet                           verbosity: ERROR              
+
+ --fail-if-warnings                fail-if-warnings: true        
+
+ --sandbox                         sandbox: true                 
+
+ --log=FILE                        log-file: FILE                
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+Options specified in a defaults file itself always have priority over
+those in another file included with a \f[CR]defaults:\f[R] entry.
+.PP
+\f[CR]verbosity\f[R] can have the values \f[CR]ERROR\f[R],
+\f[CR]WARNING\f[R], or \f[CR]INFO\f[R].
+.SS Reader options
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --shift-heading-level-by -1       shift-heading-level-by: -1    
+
+                                   indented-code-classes:        
+   --indented-code-classes python        - python                    
+
+                                                                 
+ --default-image-extension \[dq].jpg\[dq]    default-image-extension: \[aq].jpg\[aq] 
+
+ --file-scope                      file-scope: true              
+
+ --citeproc \[rs]                      filters:                      
+                                     - citeproc                  
+   --lua-filter count-words.lua \[rs]        - count-words.lua           
+  --filter special.lua               - type: json                
+                                       path: special.lua         
+
+ --metadata key=value \[rs]            metadata:                     
+  --metadata key2                    key: value                  
+                                     key2: true                  
+
+ --metadata-file meta.yaml         metadata-files:               
+                                     - meta.yaml                 
+                                                                 
+                                   metadata-file: meta.yaml      
+
+ --preserve-tabs                   preserve-tabs: true           
+
+ --tab-stop 8                      tab-stop: 8                   
+
+ --track-changes accept            track-changes: accept         
+
+ --extract-media dir               extract-media: dir            
+
+ --abbreviations abbrevs.txt       abbreviations: abbrevs.txt    
+
+ --trace                           trace: true                   
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+Metadata values specified in a defaults file are parsed as literal
+string text, not Markdown.
+.PP
+Filters will be assumed to be Lua filters if they have the
+\f[CR].lua\f[R] extension, and JSON filters otherwise.
+But the filter type can also be specified explicitly, as shown.
+Filters are run in the order specified.
+To include the built-in citeproc filter, use either \f[CR]citeproc\f[R]
+or \f[CR]{type: citeproc}\f[R].
+.SS General writer options
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --standalone                      standalone: true              
+
+ --template letter                 template: letter              
+
+ --variable key=val \[rs]              variables:                    
+   --variable key2                   key: val                    
+                                     key2: true                  
+
+ --eol nl                          eol: nl                       
+
+ --dpi 300                         dpi: 300                      
+
+ --wrap 60                         wrap: 60                      
+
+ --columns 72                      columns: 72                   
+
+ --table-of-contents               table-of-contents: true       
+
+ --toc                             toc: true                     
+
+ --toc-depth 3                     toc-depth: 3                  
+
+ --strip-comments                  strip-comments: true          
+
+ --no-highlight                    highlight-style: null         
+
+ --highlight-style kate            highlight-style: kate         
+
+                                   syntax-definitions:           
+   --syntax-definition mylang.xml        - mylang.xml                
+                                                                 
+                                   syntax-definition: mylang.xml 
+
+ --include-in-header inc.tex       include-in-header:            
+                                     - inc.tex                   
+
+                                   include-before-body:          
+--include-before-body inc.tex        - inc.tex                   
+
+ --include-after-body inc.tex      include-after-body:           
+                                     - inc.tex                   
+
+ --resource-path .:foo             resource-path: [\[aq].\[aq],\[aq]foo\[aq]]    
+
+ --request-header foo:bar          request-headers:              
+                                                                 
+                                 - [\[dq]User-Agent\[dq], \[dq]Mozilla/5.0\[dq]] 
+
+ --no-check-certificate            no-check-certificate: true    
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.SS Options affecting specific writers
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --self-contained                  self-contained: true          
+
+ --html-q-tags                     html-q-tags: true             
+
+ --ascii                           ascii: true                   
+
+ --reference-links                 reference-links: true         
+
+ --reference-location block        reference-location: block     
+
+ --markdown-headings atx           markdown-headings: atx        
+
+ --list-tables                     list-tables: true             
+
+ --top-level-division chapter      top-level-division: chapter   
+
+ --number-sections                 number-sections: true         
+
+ --number-offset=1,4               number-offset: \[rs][1,4\[rs]]        
+
+ --listings                        listings: true                
+
+ --incremental                     incremental: true             
+
+ --slide-level 2                   slide-level: 2                
+
+ --section-divs                    section-divs: true            
+
+                                   email-obfuscation: references 
+   --email-obfuscation references                                    
+
+ --id-prefix ch1                   identifier-prefix: ch1        
+
+ --title-prefix MySite             title-prefix: MySite          
+
+ --css styles/screen.css  \[rs]        css:                          
+   --css styles/special.css          - styles/screen.css         
+                                     - styles/special.css        
+
+ --reference-doc my.docx           reference-doc: my.docx        
+
+ --epub-cover-image cover.jpg      epub-cover-image: cover.jpg   
+
+ --epub-title-page=false           epub-title-page: false        
+
+ --epub-metadata meta.xml          epub-metadata: meta.xml       
+
+                                   epub-fonts:                   
+  --epub-embed-font special.otf \[rs]        - special.otf               
+                                     - headline.otf              
+   --epub-embed-font headline.otf                                    
+
+ --split-level 2                   split-level: 2                
+
+ --chunk-template=\[dq]%i.html\[dq]        chunk-template: \[dq]%i.html\[dq]     
+
+ --epub-subdirectory=\[dq]\[dq]            epub-subdirectory: \[aq]\[aq]         
+
+ --ipynb-output best               ipynb-output: best            
+
+ --pdf-engine xelatex              pdf-engine: xelatex           
+
+                                   pdf-engine-opts:              
+  --pdf-engine-opt=--shell-escape        - \[aq]-shell-escape\[aq]           
+                                                                 
+                                                                 
+                                 pdf-engine-opt: \[aq]-shell-escape\[aq] 
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.SS Citation rendering
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --citeproc                        citeproc: true                
+
+ --bibliography logic.bib          bibliography: logic.bib       
+
+ --csl ieee.csl                    csl: ieee.csl                 
+
+                                                                 
+ --citation-abbreviations ab.json    citation-abbreviations: ab.json 
+
+ --natbib                          cite-method: natbib           
+
+ --biblatex                        cite-method: biblatex         
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+\f[CR]cite-method\f[R] can be \f[CR]citeproc\f[R], \f[CR]natbib\f[R], or
+\f[CR]biblatex\f[R].
+This only affects LaTeX output.
+If you want to use citeproc to format citations, you should also set
+`citeproc: true'.
+.PP
+If you need control over when the citeproc processing is done relative
+to other filters, you should instead use \f[CR]citeproc\f[R] in the list
+of \f[CR]filters\f[R] (see Reader options).
+.SS Math rendering in HTML
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --mathjax                         html-math-method:             
+                                     method: mathjax             
+
+ --mathml                          html-math-method:             
+                                     method: mathml              
+
+ --webtex                          html-math-method:             
+                                     method: webtex              
+
+ --katex                           html-math-method:             
+                                     method: katex               
+
+ --gladtex                         html-math-method:             
+                                     method: gladtex             
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+In addition to the values listed above, \f[CR]method\f[R] can have the
+value \f[CR]plain\f[R].
+.PP
+If the command line option accepts a URL argument, an \f[CR]url:\f[R]
+field can be added to \f[CR]html-math-method:\f[R].
+.SS Options for wrapper scripts
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+
+ command line                      defaults file                     
+ --------------------------------- ----------------------------------
+ --dump-args                       dump-args: true               
+
+ --ignore-args                     ignore-args: true             
+
+.EE
+.RE
+.SH TEMPLATES
+When the \f[CR]-s/--standalone\f[R] option is used, pandoc uses a
+template to add header and footer material that is needed for a
+self-standing document.
+To see the default template that is used, just type
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -D *FORMAT*
+.EE
+.PP
+where \f[I]FORMAT\f[R] is the name of the output format.
+A custom template can be specified using the \f[CR]--template\f[R]
+option.
+You can also override the system default templates for a given output
+format \f[I]FORMAT\f[R] by putting a file
+\f[CR]templates/default.*FORMAT*\f[R] in the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R], above).
+\f[I]Exceptions:\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+For \f[CR]odt\f[R] output, customize the \f[CR]default.opendocument\f[R]
+template.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+For \f[CR]pdf\f[R] output, customize the \f[CR]default.latex\f[R]
+template (or the \f[CR]default.context\f[R] template, if you use
+\f[CR]-t context\f[R], or the \f[CR]default.ms\f[R] template, if you use
+\f[CR]-t ms\f[R], or the \f[CR]default.html\f[R] template, if you use
+\f[CR]-t html\f[R]).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]docx\f[R] and \f[CR]pptx\f[R] have no template (however, you can
+use \f[CR]--reference-doc\f[R] to customize the output).
+.PP
+Templates contain \f[I]variables\f[R], which allow for the inclusion of
+arbitrary information at any point in the file.
+They may be set at the command line using the \f[CR]-V/--variable\f[R]
+option.
+If a variable is not set, pandoc will look for the key in the
+document\[cq]s metadata, which can be set using either YAML metadata
+blocks or with the \f[CR]-M/--metadata\f[R] option.
+In addition, some variables are given default values by pandoc.
+See Variables below for a list of variables used in pandoc\[cq]s default
+templates.
+.PP
+If you use custom templates, you may need to revise them as pandoc
+changes.
+We recommend tracking the changes in the default templates, and
+modifying your custom templates accordingly.
+An easy way to do this is to fork the pandoc-templates repository and
+merge in changes after each pandoc release.
+.SS Template syntax
+.SS Comments
+Anything between the sequence \f[CR]$--\f[R] and the end of the line
+will be treated as a comment and omitted from the output.
+.SS Delimiters
+To mark variables and control structures in the template, either
+\f[CR]$\f[R]\&...\f[CR]$\f[R] or \f[CR]${\f[R]\&...\f[CR]}\f[R] may be
+used as delimiters.
+The styles may also be mixed in the same template, but the opening and
+closing delimiter must match in each case.
+The opening delimiter may be followed by one or more spaces or tabs,
+which will be ignored.
+The closing delimiter may be preceded by one or more spaces or tabs,
+which will be ignored.
+.PP
+To include a literal \f[CR]$\f[R] in the document, use \f[CR]$$\f[R].
+.SS Interpolated variables
+A slot for an interpolated variable is a variable name surrounded by
+matched delimiters.
+Variable names must begin with a letter and can contain letters,
+numbers, \f[CR]_\f[R], \f[CR]-\f[R], and \f[CR].\f[R].
+The keywords \f[CR]it\f[R], \f[CR]if\f[R], \f[CR]else\f[R],
+\f[CR]endif\f[R], \f[CR]for\f[R], \f[CR]sep\f[R], and \f[CR]endfor\f[R]
+may not be used as variable names.
+Examples:
+.IP
+.EX
+$foo$
+$foo.bar.baz$
+$foo_bar.baz-bim$
+$ foo $
+${foo}
+${foo.bar.baz}
+${foo_bar.baz-bim}
+${ foo }
+.EE
+.PP
+Variable names with periods are used to get at structured variable
+values.
+So, for example, \f[CR]employee.salary\f[R] will return the value of the
+\f[CR]salary\f[R] field of the object that is the value of the
+\f[CR]employee\f[R] field.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the value of the variable is a simple value, it will be rendered
+verbatim.
+(Note that no escaping is done; the assumption is that the calling
+program will escape the strings appropriately for the output format.)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the value is a list, the values will be concatenated.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the value is a map, the string \f[CR]true\f[R] will be rendered.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Every other value will be rendered as the empty string.
+.SS Conditionals
+A conditional begins with \f[CR]if(variable)\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters) and ends with \f[CR]endif\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters).
+It may optionally contain an \f[CR]else\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters).
+The \f[CR]if\f[R] section is used if \f[CR]variable\f[R] has a non-empty
+value, otherwise the \f[CR]else\f[R] section is used (if present).
+Examples:
+.IP
+.EX
+$if(foo)$bar$endif$
+
+$if(foo)$
+  $foo$
+$endif$
+
+$if(foo)$
+part one
+$else$
+part two
+$endif$
+
+${if(foo)}bar${endif}
+
+${if(foo)}
+  ${foo}
+${endif}
+
+${if(foo)}
+${ foo.bar }
+${else}
+no foo!
+${endif}
+.EE
+.PP
+The keyword \f[CR]elseif\f[R] may be used to simplify complex nested
+conditionals:
+.IP
+.EX
+$if(foo)$
+XXX
+$elseif(bar)$
+YYY
+$else$
+ZZZ
+$endif$
+.EE
+.SS For loops
+A for loop begins with \f[CR]for(variable)\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters) and ends with \f[CR]endfor\f[R] (enclosed in matched
+delimiters).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If \f[CR]variable\f[R] is an array, the material inside the loop will be
+evaluated repeatedly, with \f[CR]variable\f[R] being set to each value
+of the array in turn, and concatenated.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If \f[CR]variable\f[R] is a map, the material inside will be set to the
+map.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the value of the associated variable is not an array or a map, a
+single iteration will be performed on its value.
+.PP
+Examples:
+.IP
+.EX
+$for(foo)$$foo$$sep$, $endfor$
+
+$for(foo)$
+  - $foo.last$, $foo.first$
+$endfor$
+
+${ for(foo.bar) }
+  - ${ foo.bar.last }, ${ foo.bar.first }
+${ endfor }
+
+$for(mymap)$
+$it.name$: $it.office$
+$endfor$
+.EE
+.PP
+You may optionally specify a separator between consecutive values using
+\f[CR]sep\f[R] (enclosed in matched delimiters).
+The material between \f[CR]sep\f[R] and the \f[CR]endfor\f[R] is the
+separator.
+.IP
+.EX
+${ for(foo) }${ foo }${ sep }, ${ endfor }
+.EE
+.PP
+Instead of using \f[CR]variable\f[R] inside the loop, the special
+anaphoric keyword \f[CR]it\f[R] may be used.
+.IP
+.EX
+${ for(foo.bar) }
+  - ${ it.last }, ${ it.first }
+${ endfor }
+.EE
+.SS Partials
+Partials (subtemplates stored in different files) may be included by
+using the name of the partial, followed by \f[CR]()\f[R], for example:
+.IP
+.EX
+${ styles() }
+.EE
+.PP
+Partials will be sought in the directory containing the main template.
+The file name will be assumed to have the same extension as the main
+template if it lacks an extension.
+When calling the partial, the full name including file extension can
+also be used:
+.IP
+.EX
+${ styles.html() }
+.EE
+.PP
+(If a partial is not found in the directory of the template and the
+template path is given as a relative path, it will also be sought in the
+\f[CR]templates\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory.)
+.PP
+Partials may optionally be applied to variables using a colon:
+.IP
+.EX
+${ date:fancy() }
+
+${ articles:bibentry() }
+.EE
+.PP
+If \f[CR]articles\f[R] is an array, this will iterate over its values,
+applying the partial \f[CR]bibentry()\f[R] to each one.
+So the second example above is equivalent to
+.IP
+.EX
+${ for(articles) }
+${ it:bibentry() }
+${ endfor }
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that the anaphoric keyword \f[CR]it\f[R] must be used when
+iterating over partials.
+In the above examples, the \f[CR]bibentry\f[R] partial should contain
+\f[CR]it.title\f[R] (and so on) instead of \f[CR]articles.title\f[R].
+.PP
+Final newlines are omitted from included partials.
+.PP
+Partials may include other partials.
+.PP
+A separator between values of an array may be specified in square
+brackets, immediately after the variable name or partial:
+.IP
+.EX
+${months[, ]}$
+
+${articles:bibentry()[; ]$
+.EE
+.PP
+The separator in this case is literal and (unlike with \f[CR]sep\f[R] in
+an explicit \f[CR]for\f[R] loop) cannot contain interpolated variables
+or other template directives.
+.SS Nesting
+To ensure that content is \[lq]nested,\[rq] that is, subsequent lines
+indented, use the \f[CR]\[ha]\f[R] directive:
+.IP
+.EX
+$item.number$  $\[ha]$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
+.EE
+.PP
+In this example, if \f[CR]item.description\f[R] has multiple lines, they
+will all be indented to line up with the first line:
+.IP
+.EX
+00123  A fine bottle of 18-year old
+       Oban whiskey. ($148)
+.EE
+.PP
+To nest multiple lines to the same level, align them with the
+\f[CR]\[ha]\f[R] directive in the template.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+$item.number$  $\[ha]$$item.description$ ($item.price$)
+               (Available til $item.sellby$.)
+.EE
+.PP
+will produce
+.IP
+.EX
+00123  A fine bottle of 18-year old
+       Oban whiskey. ($148)
+       (Available til March 30, 2020.)
+.EE
+.PP
+If a variable occurs by itself on a line, preceded by whitespace and not
+followed by further text or directives on the same line, and the
+variable\[cq]s value contains multiple lines, it will be nested
+automatically.
+.SS Breakable spaces
+Normally, spaces in the template itself (as opposed to values of the
+interpolated variables) are not breakable, but they can be made
+breakable in part of the template by using the \f[CR]\[ti]\f[R] keyword
+(ended with another \f[CR]\[ti]\f[R]).
+.IP
+.EX
+$\[ti]$This long line may break if the document is rendered
+with a short line length.$\[ti]$
+.EE
+.SS Pipes
+A pipe transforms the value of a variable or partial.
+Pipes are specified using a slash (\f[CR]/\f[R]) between the variable
+name (or partial) and the pipe name.
+Example:
+.IP
+.EX
+$for(name)$
+$name/uppercase$
+$endfor$
+
+$for(metadata/pairs)$
+- $it.key$: $it.value$
+$endfor$
+
+$employee:name()/uppercase$
+.EE
+.PP
+Pipes may be chained:
+.IP
+.EX
+$for(employees/pairs)$
+$it.key/alpha/uppercase$. $it.name$
+$endfor$
+.EE
+.PP
+Some pipes take parameters:
+.IP
+.EX
+|----------------------|------------|
+$for(employee)$
+$it.name.first/uppercase/left 20 \[dq]| \[dq]$$it.name.salary/right 10 \[dq] | \[dq] \[dq] |\[dq]$
+$endfor$
+|----------------------|------------|
+.EE
+.PP
+Currently the following pipes are predefined:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]pairs\f[R]: Converts a map or array to an array of maps, each with
+\f[CR]key\f[R] and \f[CR]value\f[R] fields.
+If the original value was an array, the \f[CR]key\f[R] will be the array
+index, starting with 1.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]uppercase\f[R]: Converts text to uppercase.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]lowercase\f[R]: Converts text to lowercase.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]length\f[R]: Returns the length of the value: number of characters
+for a textual value, number of elements for a map or array.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]reverse\f[R]: Reverses a textual value or array, and has no effect
+on other values.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]first\f[R]: Returns the first value of an array, if applied to a
+non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]last\f[R]: Returns the last value of an array, if applied to a
+non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]rest\f[R]: Returns all but the first value of an array, if applied
+to a non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]allbutlast\f[R]: Returns all but the last value of an array, if
+applied to a non-empty array; otherwise returns the original value.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]chomp\f[R]: Removes trailing newlines (and breakable space).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]nowrap\f[R]: Disables line wrapping on breakable spaces.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]alpha\f[R]: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer
+into lowercase alphabetic characters \f[CR]a..z\f[R] (mod 26).
+This can be used to get lettered enumeration from array indices.
+To get uppercase letters, chain with \f[CR]uppercase\f[R].
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]roman\f[R]: Converts textual values that can be read as an integer
+into lowercase roman numerals.
+This can be used to get lettered enumeration from array indices.
+To get uppercase roman, chain with \f[CR]uppercase\f[R].
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]left n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
+textual value in a block of width \f[CR]n\f[R], aligned to the left,
+with an optional left and right border.
+Has no effect on other values.
+This can be used to align material in tables.
+Widths are positive integers indicating the number of characters.
+Borders are strings inside double quotes; literal \f[CR]\[dq]\f[R] and
+\f[CR]\[rs]\f[R] characters must be backslash-escaped.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]right n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders a
+textual value in a block of width \f[CR]n\f[R], aligned to the right,
+and has no effect on other values.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]center n \[dq]leftborder\[dq] \[dq]rightborder\[dq]\f[R]: Renders
+a textual value in a block of width \f[CR]n\f[R], aligned to the center,
+and has no effect on other values.
+.SS Variables
+.SS Metadata variables
+.TP
+\f[CR]title\f[R], \f[CR]author\f[R], \f[CR]date\f[R]
+allow identification of basic aspects of the document.
+Included in PDF metadata through LaTeX and ConTeXt.
+These can be set through a pandoc title block, which allows for multiple
+authors, or through a YAML metadata block:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+author:
+- Aristotle
+- Peter Abelard
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that if you just want to set PDF or HTML metadata, without
+including a title block in the document itself, you can set the
+\f[CR]title-meta\f[R], \f[CR]author-meta\f[R], and \f[CR]date-meta\f[R]
+variables.
+(By default these are set automatically, based on \f[CR]title\f[R],
+\f[CR]author\f[R], and \f[CR]date\f[R].)
+The page title in HTML is set by \f[CR]pagetitle\f[R], which is equal to
+\f[CR]title\f[R] by default.
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]subtitle\f[R]
+document subtitle, included in HTML, EPUB, LaTeX, ConTeXt, and docx
+documents
+.TP
+\f[CR]abstract\f[R]
+document summary, included in HTML, LaTeX, ConTeXt, AsciiDoc, and docx
+documents
+.TP
+\f[CR]abstract-title\f[R]
+title of abstract, currently used only in HTML, EPUB, and docx.
+This will be set automatically to a localized value, depending on
+\f[CR]lang\f[R], but can be manually overridden.
+.TP
+\f[CR]keywords\f[R]
+list of keywords to be included in HTML, PDF, ODT, pptx, docx and
+AsciiDoc metadata; repeat as for \f[CR]author\f[R], above
+.TP
+\f[CR]subject\f[R]
+document subject, included in ODT, PDF, docx, EPUB, and pptx metadata
+.TP
+\f[CR]description\f[R]
+document description, included in ODT, docx and pptx metadata.
+Some applications show this as \f[CR]Comments\f[R] metadata.
+.TP
+\f[CR]category\f[R]
+document category, included in docx and pptx metadata
+.PP
+Additionally, any root-level string metadata, not included in ODT, docx
+or pptx metadata is added as a \f[I]custom property\f[R].
+The following YAML metadata block for instance:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+title:  \[aq]This is the title\[aq]
+subtitle: \[dq]This is the subtitle\[dq]
+author:
+- Author One
+- Author Two
+description: |
+    This is a long
+    description.
+
+    It consists of two paragraphs
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+will include \f[CR]title\f[R], \f[CR]author\f[R] and
+\f[CR]description\f[R] as standard document properties and
+\f[CR]subtitle\f[R] as a custom property when converting to docx, ODT or
+pptx.
+.SS Language variables
+.TP
+\f[CR]lang\f[R]
+identifies the main language of the document using IETF language tags
+(following the BCP 47 standard), such as \f[CR]en\f[R] or
+\f[CR]en-GB\f[R].
+The Language subtag lookup tool can look up or verify these tags.
+This affects most formats, and controls hyphenation in PDF output when
+using LaTeX (through \f[CR]babel\f[R] and \f[CR]polyglossia\f[R]) or
+ConTeXt.
+.RS
+.PP
+Use native pandoc Divs and Spans with the \f[CR]lang\f[R] attribute to
+switch the language:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+lang: en-GB
+\&...
+
+Text in the main document language (British English).
+
+::: {lang=fr-CA}
+> Cette citation est écrite en français canadien.
+:::
+
+More text in English. [\[aq]Zitat auf Deutsch.\[aq]]{lang=de}
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]dir\f[R]
+the base script direction, either \f[CR]rtl\f[R] (right-to-left) or
+\f[CR]ltr\f[R] (left-to-right).
+.RS
+.PP
+For bidirectional documents, native pandoc \f[CR]span\f[R]s and
+\f[CR]div\f[R]s with the \f[CR]dir\f[R] attribute (value \f[CR]rtl\f[R]
+or \f[CR]ltr\f[R]) can be used to override the base direction in some
+output formats.
+This may not always be necessary if the final renderer (e.g.\ the
+browser, when generating HTML) supports the Unicode Bidirectional
+Algorithm.
+.PP
+When using LaTeX for bidirectional documents, only the
+\f[CR]xelatex\f[R] engine is fully supported (use
+\f[CR]--pdf-engine=xelatex\f[R]).
+.RE
+.SS Variables for HTML
+.TP
+\f[CR]document-css\f[R]
+Enables inclusion of most of the CSS in the \f[CR]styles.html\f[R]
+partial (have a look with
+\f[CR]pandoc --print-default-data-file=templates/styles.html\f[R]).
+Unless you use \f[CR]--css\f[R], this variable is set to \f[CR]true\f[R]
+by default.
+You can disable it with e.g.\ \f[CR]pandoc -M document-css=false\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]mainfont\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]font-family\f[R] property on the \f[CR]html\f[R]
+element.
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontsize\f[R]
+sets the base CSS \f[CR]font-size\f[R], which you\[cq]d usually set to
+e.g.\ \f[CR]20px\f[R], but it also accepts \f[CR]pt\f[R] (12pt = 16px in
+most browsers).
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]color\f[R] property on the \f[CR]html\f[R] element.
+.TP
+\f[CR]linkcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]color\f[R] property on all links.
+.TP
+\f[CR]monofont\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]font-family\f[R] property on \f[CR]code\f[R]
+elements.
+.TP
+\f[CR]monobackgroundcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]background-color\f[R] property on \f[CR]code\f[R]
+elements and adds extra padding.
+.TP
+\f[CR]linestretch\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]line-height\f[R] property on the \f[CR]html\f[R]
+element, which is preferred to be unitless.
+.TP
+\f[CR]maxwidth\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]max-width\f[R] property (default is 32em).
+.TP
+\f[CR]backgroundcolor\f[R]
+sets the CSS \f[CR]background-color\f[R] property on the \f[CR]html\f[R]
+element.
+.TP
+\f[CR]margin-left\f[R], \f[CR]margin-right\f[R], \f[CR]margin-top\f[R], \f[CR]margin-bottom\f[R]
+sets the corresponding CSS \f[CR]padding\f[R] properties on the
+\f[CR]body\f[R] element.
+.PP
+To override or extend some CSS for just one document, include for
+example:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+header-includes: |
+  <style>
+  blockquote {
+    font-style: italic;
+  }
+  tr.even {
+    background-color: #f0f0f0;
+  }
+  td, th {
+    padding: 0.5em 2em 0.5em 0.5em;
+  }
+  tbody {
+    border-bottom: none;
+  }
+  </style>
+---
+.EE
+.SS Variables for HTML math
+.TP
+\f[CR]classoption\f[R]
+when using KaTeX, you can render display math equations flush left using
+YAML metadata or with \f[CR]-M classoption=fleqn\f[R].
+.SS Variables for HTML slides
+These affect HTML output when producing slide shows with pandoc.
+.TP
+\f[CR]institute\f[R]
+author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
+.TP
+\f[CR]revealjs-url\f[R]
+base URL for reveal.js documents (defaults to
+\f[CR]https://unpkg.com/reveal.js\[at]\[ha]4/\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]s5-url\f[R]
+base URL for S5 documents (defaults to \f[CR]s5/default\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]slidy-url\f[R]
+base URL for Slidy documents (defaults to
+\f[CR]https://www.w3.org/Talks/Tools/Slidy2\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]slideous-url\f[R]
+base URL for Slideous documents (defaults to \f[CR]slideous\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]title-slide-attributes\f[R]
+additional attributes for the title slide of reveal.js slide shows.
+See background in reveal.js, beamer, and pptx for an example.
+.PP
+All reveal.js configuration options are available as variables.
+To turn off boolean flags that default to true in reveal.js, use
+\f[CR]0\f[R].
+.SS Variables for Beamer slides
+These variables change the appearance of PDF slides using
+\f[CR]beamer\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]aspectratio\f[R]
+slide aspect ratio (\f[CR]43\f[R] for 4:3 [default], \f[CR]169\f[R] for
+16:9, \f[CR]1610\f[R] for 16:10, \f[CR]149\f[R] for 14:9, \f[CR]141\f[R]
+for 1.41:1, \f[CR]54\f[R] for 5:4, \f[CR]32\f[R] for 3:2)
+.TP
+\f[CR]beameroption\f[R]
+add extra beamer option with \f[CR]\[rs]setbeameroption{}\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]institute\f[R]
+author affiliations: can be a list when there are multiple authors
+.TP
+\f[CR]logo\f[R]
+logo image for slides
+.TP
+\f[CR]navigation\f[R]
+controls navigation symbols (default is \f[CR]empty\f[R] for no
+navigation symbols; other valid values are \f[CR]frame\f[R],
+\f[CR]vertical\f[R], and \f[CR]horizontal\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]section-titles\f[R]
+enables \[lq]title pages\[rq] for new sections (default is true)
+.TP
+\f[CR]theme\f[R], \f[CR]colortheme\f[R], \f[CR]fonttheme\f[R], \f[CR]innertheme\f[R], \f[CR]outertheme\f[R]
+beamer themes
+.TP
+\f[CR]themeoptions\f[R]
+options for LaTeX beamer themes (a list).
+.TP
+\f[CR]titlegraphic\f[R]
+image for title slide
+.SS Variables for PowerPoint
+These variables control the visual aspects of a slide show that are not
+easily controlled via templates.
+.TP
+\f[CR]monofont\f[R]
+font to use for code.
+.SS Variables for LaTeX
+Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with a LaTeX engine.
+.SS Layout
+.TP
+\f[CR]block-headings\f[R]
+make \f[CR]\[rs]paragraph\f[R] and \f[CR]\[rs]subparagraph\f[R] (fourth-
+and fifth-level headings, or fifth- and sixth-level with book classes)
+free-standing rather than run-in; requires further formatting to
+distinguish from \f[CR]\[rs]subsubsection\f[R] (third- or fourth-level
+headings).
+Instead of using this option, KOMA-Script can adjust headings more
+extensively:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+documentclass: scrartcl
+header-includes: |
+  \[rs]RedeclareSectionCommand[
+    beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
+    afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
+    font=\[rs]normalfont\[rs]itshape]{paragraph}
+  \[rs]RedeclareSectionCommand[
+    beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,
+    afterskip=1sp plus -1sp minus 1sp,
+    font=\[rs]normalfont\[rs]scshape,
+    indent=0pt]{subparagraph}
+\&...
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]classoption\f[R]
+option for document class, e.g.\ \f[CR]oneside\f[R]; repeat for multiple
+options:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+classoption:
+- twocolumn
+- landscape
+\&...
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]documentclass\f[R]
+document class: usually one of the standard classes, \f[CR]article\f[R],
+\f[CR]book\f[R], and \f[CR]report\f[R]; the KOMA-Script equivalents,
+\f[CR]scrartcl\f[R], \f[CR]scrbook\f[R], and \f[CR]scrreprt\f[R], which
+default to smaller margins; or \f[CR]memoir\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]geometry\f[R]
+option for \f[CR]geometry\f[R] package, e.g.\ \f[CR]margin=1in\f[R];
+repeat for multiple options:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+geometry:
+- top=30mm
+- left=20mm
+- heightrounded
+\&...
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]hyperrefoptions\f[R]
+option for \f[CR]hyperref\f[R] package, e.g.\ \f[CR]linktoc=all\f[R];
+repeat for multiple options:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+hyperrefoptions:
+- linktoc=all
+- pdfwindowui
+- pdfpagemode=FullScreen
+\&...
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]indent\f[R]
+if true, pandoc will use document class settings for indentation (the
+default LaTeX template otherwise removes indentation and adds space
+between paragraphs)
+.TP
+\f[CR]linestretch\f[R]
+adjusts line spacing using the \f[CR]setspace\f[R] package,
+e.g.\ \f[CR]1.25\f[R], \f[CR]1.5\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]margin-left\f[R], \f[CR]margin-right\f[R], \f[CR]margin-top\f[R], \f[CR]margin-bottom\f[R]
+sets margins if \f[CR]geometry\f[R] is not used (otherwise
+\f[CR]geometry\f[R] overrides these)
+.TP
+\f[CR]pagestyle\f[R]
+control \f[CR]\[rs]pagestyle{}\f[R]: the default article class supports
+\f[CR]plain\f[R] (default), \f[CR]empty\f[R] (no running heads or page
+numbers), and \f[CR]headings\f[R] (section titles in running heads)
+.TP
+\f[CR]papersize\f[R]
+paper size, e.g.\ \f[CR]letter\f[R], \f[CR]a4\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]secnumdepth\f[R]
+numbering depth for sections (with \f[CR]--number-sections\f[R] option
+or \f[CR]numbersections\f[R] variable)
+.TP
+\f[CR]beamerarticle\f[R]
+produce an article from Beamer slides
+.SS Fonts
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontenc\f[R]
+allows font encoding to be specified through \f[CR]fontenc\f[R] package
+(with \f[CR]pdflatex\f[R]); default is \f[CR]T1\f[R] (see LaTeX font
+encodings guide)
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontfamily\f[R]
+font package for use with \f[CR]pdflatex\f[R]: TeX Live includes many
+options, documented in the LaTeX Font Catalogue.
+The default is Latin Modern.
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontfamilyoptions\f[R]
+options for package used as \f[CR]fontfamily\f[R]; repeat for multiple
+options.
+For example, to use the Libertine font with proportional lowercase
+(old-style) figures through the \f[CR]libertinus\f[R] package:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+fontfamily: libertinus
+fontfamilyoptions:
+- osf
+- p
+\&...
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontsize\f[R]
+font size for body text.
+The standard classes allow 10pt, 11pt, and 12pt.
+To use another size, set \f[CR]documentclass\f[R] to one of the
+KOMA-Script classes, such as \f[CR]scrartcl\f[R] or \f[CR]scrbook\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]mainfont\f[R], \f[CR]sansfont\f[R], \f[CR]monofont\f[R], \f[CR]mathfont\f[R], \f[CR]CJKmainfont\f[R], \f[CR]CJKsansfont\f[R], \f[CR]CJKmonofont\f[R]
+font families for use with \f[CR]xelatex\f[R] or \f[CR]lualatex\f[R]:
+take the name of any system font, using the \f[CR]fontspec\f[R] package.
+\f[CR]CJKmainfont\f[R] uses the \f[CR]xecjk\f[R] package.
+.TP
+\f[CR]mainfontoptions\f[R], \f[CR]sansfontoptions\f[R], \f[CR]monofontoptions\f[R], \f[CR]mathfontoptions\f[R], \f[CR]CJKoptions\f[R]
+options to use with \f[CR]mainfont\f[R], \f[CR]sansfont\f[R],
+\f[CR]monofont\f[R], \f[CR]mathfont\f[R], \f[CR]CJKmainfont\f[R] in
+\f[CR]xelatex\f[R] and \f[CR]lualatex\f[R].
+Allow for any choices available through \f[CR]fontspec\f[R]; repeat for
+multiple options.
+For example, to use the TeX Gyre version of Palatino with lowercase
+figures:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+mainfont: TeX Gyre Pagella
+mainfontoptions:
+- Numbers=Lowercase
+- Numbers=Proportional
+\&...
+.EE
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]babelfonts\f[R]
+a map of Babel language names (e.g.\ \f[CR]chinese\f[R]) to the font to
+be used with the language:
+.RS
+.PP
+   *   *   *   *   *
+.PP
+babelfonts: chinese-hant: \[lq]Noto Serif CJK TC\[rq] russian: \[lq]Noto
+Serif\[rq] \&...
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]microtypeoptions\f[R]
+options to pass to the microtype package
+.SS Links
+.TP
+\f[CR]colorlinks\f[R]
+add color to link text; automatically enabled if any of
+\f[CR]linkcolor\f[R], \f[CR]filecolor\f[R], \f[CR]citecolor\f[R],
+\f[CR]urlcolor\f[R], or \f[CR]toccolor\f[R] are set
+.TP
+\f[CR]boxlinks\f[R]
+add visible box around links (has no effect if \f[CR]colorlinks\f[R] is
+set)
+.TP
+\f[CR]linkcolor\f[R], \f[CR]filecolor\f[R], \f[CR]citecolor\f[R], \f[CR]urlcolor\f[R], \f[CR]toccolor\f[R]
+color for internal links, external links, citation links, linked URLs,
+and links in table of contents, respectively: uses options allowed by
+\f[CR]xcolor\f[R], including the \f[CR]dvipsnames\f[R],
+\f[CR]svgnames\f[R], and \f[CR]x11names\f[R] lists
+.TP
+\f[CR]links-as-notes\f[R]
+causes links to be printed as footnotes
+.TP
+\f[CR]urlstyle\f[R]
+style for URLs (e.g., \f[CR]tt\f[R], \f[CR]rm\f[R], \f[CR]sf\f[R], and,
+the default, \f[CR]same\f[R])
+.SS Front matter
+.TP
+\f[CR]lof\f[R], \f[CR]lot\f[R]
+include list of figures, list of tables
+.TP
+\f[CR]thanks\f[R]
+contents of acknowledgments footnote after document title
+.TP
+\f[CR]toc\f[R]
+include table of contents (can also be set using
+\f[CR]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]toc-depth\f[R]
+level of section to include in table of contents
+.SS BibLaTeX Bibliographies
+These variables function when using BibLaTeX for citation rendering.
+.TP
+\f[CR]biblatexoptions\f[R]
+list of options for biblatex
+.TP
+\f[CR]biblio-style\f[R]
+bibliography style, when used with \f[CR]--natbib\f[R] and
+\f[CR]--biblatex\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]biblio-title\f[R]
+bibliography title, when used with \f[CR]--natbib\f[R] and
+\f[CR]--biblatex\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]bibliography\f[R]
+bibliography to use for resolving references
+.TP
+\f[CR]natbiboptions\f[R]
+list of options for natbib
+.SS Variables for ConTeXt
+Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with ConTeXt.
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontsize\f[R]
+font size for body text (e.g.\ \f[CR]10pt\f[R], \f[CR]12pt\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]headertext\f[R], \f[CR]footertext\f[R]
+text to be placed in running header or footer (see ConTeXt Headers and
+Footers); repeat up to four times for different placement
+.TP
+\f[CR]indenting\f[R]
+controls indentation of paragraphs, e.g.\ \f[CR]yes,small,next\f[R] (see
+ConTeXt Indentation); repeat for multiple options
+.TP
+\f[CR]interlinespace\f[R]
+adjusts line spacing, e.g.\ \f[CR]4ex\f[R] (using
+\f[CR]setupinterlinespace\f[R]); repeat for multiple options
+.TP
+\f[CR]layout\f[R]
+options for page margins and text arrangement (see ConTeXt Layout);
+repeat for multiple options
+.TP
+\f[CR]linkcolor\f[R], \f[CR]contrastcolor\f[R]
+color for links outside and inside a page, e.g.\ \f[CR]red\f[R],
+\f[CR]blue\f[R] (see ConTeXt Color)
+.TP
+\f[CR]linkstyle\f[R]
+typeface style for links, e.g.\ \f[CR]normal\f[R], \f[CR]bold\f[R],
+\f[CR]slanted\f[R], \f[CR]boldslanted\f[R], \f[CR]type\f[R],
+\f[CR]cap\f[R], \f[CR]small\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]lof\f[R], \f[CR]lot\f[R]
+include list of figures, list of tables
+.TP
+\f[CR]mainfont\f[R], \f[CR]sansfont\f[R], \f[CR]monofont\f[R], \f[CR]mathfont\f[R]
+font families: take the name of any system font (see ConTeXt Font
+Switching)
+.TP
+\f[CR]margin-left\f[R], \f[CR]margin-right\f[R], \f[CR]margin-top\f[R], \f[CR]margin-bottom\f[R]
+sets margins, if \f[CR]layout\f[R] is not used (otherwise
+\f[CR]layout\f[R] overrides these)
+.TP
+\f[CR]pagenumbering\f[R]
+page number style and location (using \f[CR]setuppagenumbering\f[R]);
+repeat for multiple options
+.TP
+\f[CR]papersize\f[R]
+paper size, e.g.\ \f[CR]letter\f[R], \f[CR]A4\f[R], \f[CR]landscape\f[R]
+(see ConTeXt Paper Setup); repeat for multiple options
+.TP
+\f[CR]pdfa\f[R]
+adds to the preamble the setup necessary to generate PDF/A of the type
+specified, e.g.\ \f[CR]1a:2005\f[R], \f[CR]2a\f[R].
+If no type is specified (i.e.\ the value is set to True, by e.g.
+\f[CR]--metadata=pdfa\f[R] or \f[CR]pdfa: true\f[R] in a YAML metadata
+block), \f[CR]1b:2005\f[R] will be used as default, for reasons of
+backwards compatibility.
+Using \f[CR]--variable=pdfa\f[R] without specified value is not
+supported.
+To successfully generate PDF/A the required ICC color profiles have to
+be available and the content and all included files (such as images)
+have to be standard-conforming.
+The ICC profiles and output intent may be specified using the variables
+\f[CR]pdfaiccprofile\f[R] and \f[CR]pdfaintent\f[R].
+See also ConTeXt PDFA for more details.
+.TP
+\f[CR]pdfaiccprofile\f[R]
+when used in conjunction with \f[CR]pdfa\f[R], specifies the ICC profile
+to use in the PDF, e.g.\ \f[CR]default.cmyk\f[R].
+If left unspecified, \f[CR]sRGB.icc\f[R] is used as default.
+May be repeated to include multiple profiles.
+Note that the profiles have to be available on the system.
+They can be obtained from ConTeXt ICC Profiles.
+.TP
+\f[CR]pdfaintent\f[R]
+when used in conjunction with \f[CR]pdfa\f[R], specifies the output
+intent for the colors,
+e.g.\ \f[CR]ISO coated v2 300\[rs]letterpercent\[rs]space (ECI)\f[R] If
+left unspecified, \f[CR]sRGB IEC61966-2.1\f[R] is used as default.
+.TP
+\f[CR]toc\f[R]
+include table of contents (can also be set using
+\f[CR]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]urlstyle\f[R]
+typeface style for links without link text, e.g.\ \f[CR]normal\f[R],
+\f[CR]bold\f[R], \f[CR]slanted\f[R], \f[CR]boldslanted\f[R],
+\f[CR]type\f[R], \f[CR]cap\f[R], \f[CR]small\f[R]
+.TP
+\f[CR]whitespace\f[R]
+spacing between paragraphs, e.g.\ \f[CR]none\f[R], \f[CR]small\f[R]
+(using \f[CR]setupwhitespace\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]includesource\f[R]
+include all source documents as file attachments in the PDF file
+.SS Variables for \f[CR]wkhtmltopdf\f[R]
+Pandoc uses these variables when creating a PDF with
+\f[CR]wkhtmltopdf\f[R].
+The \f[CR]--css\f[R] option also affects the output.
+.TP
+\f[CR]footer-html\f[R], \f[CR]header-html\f[R]
+add information to the header and footer
+.TP
+\f[CR]margin-left\f[R], \f[CR]margin-right\f[R], \f[CR]margin-top\f[R], \f[CR]margin-bottom\f[R]
+set the page margins
+.TP
+\f[CR]papersize\f[R]
+sets the PDF paper size
+.SS Variables for man pages
+.TP
+\f[CR]adjusting\f[R]
+adjusts text to left (\f[CR]l\f[R]), right (\f[CR]r\f[R]), center
+(\f[CR]c\f[R]), or both (\f[CR]b\f[R]) margins
+.TP
+\f[CR]footer\f[R]
+footer in man pages
+.TP
+\f[CR]header\f[R]
+header in man pages
+.TP
+\f[CR]section\f[R]
+section number in man pages
+.SS Variables for Typst
+.TP
+\f[CR]margin\f[R]
+A dictionary with the fields defined in the Typst documentation:
+\f[CR]x\f[R], \f[CR]y\f[R], \f[CR]top\f[R], \f[CR]bottom\f[R],
+\f[CR]left\f[R], \f[CR]right\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]papersize\f[R]
+Paper size: \f[CR]a4\f[R], \f[CR]us-letter\f[R], etc.
+.TP
+\f[CR]mainfont\f[R]
+Name of system font to use for the main font.
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontsize\f[R]
+Font size (e.g., \f[CR]12pt\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]section-numbering\f[R]
+Schema to use for numbering sections, e.g.\ \f[CR]1.A.1\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]columns\f[R]
+Number of columns for body text.
+.SS Variables for ms
+.TP
+\f[CR]fontfamily\f[R]
+\f[CR]A\f[R] (Avant Garde), \f[CR]B\f[R] (Bookman), \f[CR]C\f[R]
+(Helvetica), \f[CR]HN\f[R] (Helvetica Narrow), \f[CR]P\f[R] (Palatino),
+or \f[CR]T\f[R] (Times New Roman).
+This setting does not affect source code, which is always displayed
+using monospace Courier.
+These built-in fonts are limited in their coverage of characters.
+Additional fonts may be installed using the script
+\f[CR]install-font.sh\f[R] provided by Peter Schaffter and documented in
+detail on his web site.
+.TP
+\f[CR]indent\f[R]
+paragraph indent (e.g.\ \f[CR]2m\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]lineheight\f[R]
+line height (e.g.\ \f[CR]12p\f[R])
+.TP
+\f[CR]pointsize\f[R]
+point size (e.g.\ \f[CR]10p\f[R])
+.SS Variables set automatically
+Pandoc sets these variables automatically in response to options or
+document contents; users can also modify them.
+These vary depending on the output format, and include the following:
+.TP
+\f[CR]body\f[R]
+body of document
+.TP
+\f[CR]date-meta\f[R]
+the \f[CR]date\f[R] variable converted to ISO 8601 YYYY-MM-DD, included
+in all HTML based formats (dzslides, epub, html, html4, html5, revealjs,
+s5, slideous, slidy).
+The recognized formats for \f[CR]date\f[R] are: \f[CR]mm/dd/yyyy\f[R],
+\f[CR]mm/dd/yy\f[R], \f[CR]yyyy-mm-dd\f[R] (ISO 8601),
+\f[CR]dd MM yyyy\f[R] (e.g.\ either \f[CR]02 Apr 2018\f[R] or
+\f[CR]02 April 2018\f[R]), \f[CR]MM dd, yyyy\f[R]
+(e.g.\ \f[CR]Apr. 02, 2018\f[R] or
+\f[CR]April 02, 2018),\f[R]yyyy[mm[dd]]\f[CR](e.g.\f[R]20180402,
+\f[CR]201804\f[R] or \f[CR]2018\f[R]).
+.TP
+\f[CR]header-includes\f[R]
+contents specified by \f[CR]-H/--include-in-header\f[R] (may have
+multiple values)
+.TP
+\f[CR]include-before\f[R]
+contents specified by \f[CR]-B/--include-before-body\f[R] (may have
+multiple values)
+.TP
+\f[CR]include-after\f[R]
+contents specified by \f[CR]-A/--include-after-body\f[R] (may have
+multiple values)
+.TP
+\f[CR]meta-json\f[R]
+JSON representation of all of the document\[cq]s metadata.
+Field values are transformed to the selected output format.
+.TP
+\f[CR]numbersections\f[R]
+non-null value if \f[CR]-N/--number-sections\f[R] was specified
+.TP
+\f[CR]sourcefile\f[R], \f[CR]outputfile\f[R]
+source and destination filenames, as given on the command line.
+\f[CR]sourcefile\f[R] can also be a list if input comes from multiple
+files, or empty if input is from stdin.
+You can use the following snippet in your template to distinguish them:
+.RS
+.IP
+.EX
+$if(sourcefile)$
+$for(sourcefile)$
+$sourcefile$
+$endfor$
+$else$
+(stdin)
+$endif$
+.EE
+.PP
+Similarly, \f[CR]outputfile\f[R] can be \f[CR]-\f[R] if output goes to
+the terminal.
+.PP
+If you need absolute paths, use e.g.\ \f[CR]$curdir$/$sourcefile$\f[R].
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]curdir\f[R]
+working directory from which pandoc is run.
+.TP
+\f[CR]pandoc-version\f[R]
+pandoc version.
+.TP
+\f[CR]toc\f[R]
+non-null value if \f[CR]--toc/--table-of-contents\f[R] was specified
+.TP
+\f[CR]toc-title\f[R]
+title of table of contents (works only with EPUB, HTML, revealjs,
+opendocument, odt, docx, pptx, beamer, LaTeX)
+.SH EXTENSIONS
+The behavior of some of the readers and writers can be adjusted by
+enabling or disabling various extensions.
+.PP
+An extension can be enabled by adding \f[CR]+EXTENSION\f[R] to the
+format name and disabled by adding \f[CR]-EXTENSION\f[R].
+For example, \f[CR]--from markdown_strict+footnotes\f[R] is strict
+Markdown with footnotes enabled, while
+\f[CR]--from markdown-footnotes-pipe_tables\f[R] is pandoc\[cq]s
+Markdown without footnotes or pipe tables.
+.PP
+The markdown reader and writer make by far the most use of extensions.
+Extensions only used by them are therefore covered in the section
+Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown below (see Markdown variants for
+\f[CR]commonmark\f[R] and \f[CR]gfm\f[R]).
+In the following, extensions that also work for other formats are
+covered.
+.PP
+Note that markdown extensions added to the \f[CR]ipynb\f[R] format
+affect Markdown cells in Jupyter notebooks (as do command-line options
+like \f[CR]--markdown-headings\f[R]).
+.SS Typography
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]smart\f[R]
+Interpret straight quotes as curly quotes, \f[CR]---\f[R] as em-dashes,
+\f[CR]--\f[R] as en-dashes, and \f[CR]...\f[R] as ellipses.
+Nonbreaking spaces are inserted after certain abbreviations, such as
+\[lq]Mr.\[rq]
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+input formats
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]commonmark\f[R], \f[CR]latex\f[R],
+\f[CR]mediawiki\f[R], \f[CR]org\f[R], \f[CR]rst\f[R], \f[CR]twiki\f[R],
+\f[CR]html\f[R]
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]context\f[R],
+\f[CR]rst\f[R]
+.TP
+enabled by default in
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]context\f[R] (both input
+and output)
+.PP
+Note: If you are \f[I]writing\f[R] Markdown, then the \f[CR]smart\f[R]
+extension has the reverse effect: what would have been curly quotes
+comes out straight.
+.PP
+In LaTeX, \f[CR]smart\f[R] means to use the standard TeX ligatures for
+quotation marks (\f[CR]\[ga]\[ga]\f[R] and \f[CR]\[aq]\[aq]\f[R] for
+double quotes, \f[CR]\[ga]\f[R] and \f[CR]\[aq]\f[R] for single quotes)
+and dashes (\f[CR]--\f[R] for en-dash and \f[CR]---\f[R] for em-dash).
+If \f[CR]smart\f[R] is disabled, then in reading LaTeX pandoc will parse
+these characters literally.
+In writing LaTeX, enabling \f[CR]smart\f[R] tells pandoc to use the
+ligatures when possible; if \f[CR]smart\f[R] is disabled pandoc will use
+unicode quotation mark and dash characters.
+.SS Headings and sections
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]auto_identifiers\f[R]
+A heading without an explicitly specified identifier will be
+automatically assigned a unique identifier based on the heading text.
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+input formats
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]rst\f[R],
+\f[CR]mediawiki\f[R], \f[CR]textile\f[R]
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]muse\f[R]
+.TP
+enabled by default in
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]muse\f[R]
+.PP
+The default algorithm used to derive the identifier from the heading
+text is:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Remove all formatting, links, etc.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Remove all footnotes.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Remove all non-alphanumeric characters, except underscores, hyphens, and
+periods.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Replace all spaces and newlines with hyphens.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Convert all alphabetic characters to lowercase.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Remove everything up to the first letter (identifiers may not begin with
+a number or punctuation mark).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If nothing is left after this, use the identifier \f[CR]section\f[R].
+.PP
+Thus, for example,
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+  Heading                       Identifier
+  ----------------------------- -----------------------------
+  Heading identifiers in HTML   heading-identifiers-in-html
+  Maître d\[aq]hôtel                maître-dhôtel
+  *Dogs*?--in *my* house?       dogs--in-my-house
+  [HTML], [S5], or [RTF]?       html-s5-or-rtf
+  3. Applications               applications
+  33                            section
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+These rules should, in most cases, allow one to determine the identifier
+from the heading text.
+The exception is when several headings have the same text; in this case,
+the first will get an identifier as described above; the second will get
+the same identifier with \f[CR]-1\f[R] appended; the third with
+\f[CR]-2\f[R]; and so on.
+.PP
+(However, a different algorithm is used if
+\f[CR]gfm_auto_identifiers\f[R] is enabled; see below.)
+.PP
+These identifiers are used to provide link targets in the table of
+contents generated by the \f[CR]--toc|--table-of-contents\f[R] option.
+They also make it easy to provide links from one section of a document
+to another.
+A link to this section, for example, might look like this:
+.IP
+.EX
+See the section on
+[heading identifiers](#heading-identifiers-in-html-latex-and-context).
+.EE
+.PP
+Note, however, that this method of providing links to sections works
+only in HTML, LaTeX, and ConTeXt formats.
+.PP
+If the \f[CR]--section-divs\f[R] option is specified, then each section
+will be wrapped in a \f[CR]section\f[R] (or a \f[CR]div\f[R], if
+\f[CR]html4\f[R] was specified), and the identifier will be attached to
+the enclosing \f[CR]<section>\f[R] (or \f[CR]<div>\f[R]) tag rather than
+the heading itself.
+This allows entire sections to be manipulated using JavaScript or
+treated differently in CSS.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]ascii_identifiers\f[R]
+Causes the identifiers produced by \f[CR]auto_identifiers\f[R] to be
+pure ASCII.
+Accents are stripped off of accented Latin letters, and non-Latin
+letters are omitted.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]gfm_auto_identifiers\f[R]
+Changes the algorithm used by \f[CR]auto_identifiers\f[R] to conform to
+GitHub\[cq]s method.
+Spaces are converted to dashes (\f[CR]-\f[R]), uppercase characters to
+lowercase characters, and punctuation characters other than \f[CR]-\f[R]
+and \f[CR]_\f[R] are removed.
+Emojis are replaced by their names.
+.SS Math Input
+The extensions \f[CR]tex_math_dollars\f[R], \f[CR]tex_math_gfm\f[R],
+\f[CR]tex_math_single_backslash\f[R], and
+\f[CR]tex_math_double_backslash\f[R] are described in the section about
+Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown.
+.PP
+However, they can also be used with HTML input.
+This is handy for reading web pages formatted using MathJax, for
+example.
+.SS Raw HTML/TeX
+The following extensions are described in more detail in their
+respective sections of Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]raw_html\f[R] allows HTML elements which are not representable in
+pandoc\[cq]s AST to be parsed as raw HTML.
+By default, this is disabled for HTML input.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]raw_tex\f[R] allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be included in
+a document.
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats (in
+addition to \f[CR]markdown\f[R]):
+.RS 2
+.TP
+input formats
+\f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]textile\f[R], \f[CR]html\f[R] (environments,
+\f[CR]\[rs]ref\f[R], and \f[CR]\[rs]eqref\f[R] only), \f[CR]ipynb\f[R]
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]textile\f[R], \f[CR]commonmark\f[R]
+.PP
+Note: as applied to \f[CR]ipynb\f[R], \f[CR]raw_html\f[R] and
+\f[CR]raw_tex\f[R] affect not only raw TeX in markdown cells, but data
+with mime type \f[CR]text/html\f[R] in output cells.
+Since the \f[CR]ipynb\f[R] reader attempts to preserve the richest
+possible outputs when several options are given, you will get best
+results if you disable \f[CR]raw_html\f[R] and \f[CR]raw_tex\f[R] when
+converting to formats like \f[CR]docx\f[R] which don\[cq]t allow raw
+\f[CR]html\f[R] or \f[CR]tex\f[R].
+.RE
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]native_divs\f[R] causes HTML \f[CR]div\f[R] elements to be parsed
+as native pandoc Div blocks.
+If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
+\f[CR]-f html-native_divs+raw_html\f[R].
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]native_spans\f[R] causes HTML \f[CR]span\f[R] elements to be
+parsed as native pandoc Span inlines.
+If you want them to be parsed as raw HTML, use
+\f[CR]-f html-native_spans+raw_html\f[R].
+If you want to drop all \f[CR]div\f[R]s and \f[CR]span\f[R]s when
+converting HTML to Markdown, you can use
+\f[CR]pandoc -f html-native_divs-native_spans -t markdown\f[R].
+.SS Literate Haskell support
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]literate_haskell\f[R]
+Treat the document as literate Haskell source.
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+input formats
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]rst\f[R], \f[CR]latex\f[R]
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]markdown\f[R], \f[CR]rst\f[R], \f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]html\f[R]
+.PP
+If you append \f[CR]+lhs\f[R] (or \f[CR]+literate_haskell\f[R]) to one
+of the formats above, pandoc will treat the document as literate Haskell
+source.
+This means that
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In Markdown input, \[lq]bird track\[rq] sections will be parsed as
+Haskell code rather than block quotations.
+Text between \f[CR]\[rs]begin{code}\f[R] and \f[CR]\[rs]end{code}\f[R]
+will also be treated as Haskell code.
+For ATX-style headings the character `=' will be used instead of `#'.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In Markdown output, code blocks with classes \f[CR]haskell\f[R] and
+\f[CR]literate\f[R] will be rendered using bird tracks, and block
+quotations will be indented one space, so they will not be treated as
+Haskell code.
+In addition, headings will be rendered setext-style (with underlines)
+rather than ATX-style (with `#' characters).
+(This is because ghc treats `#' characters in column 1 as introducing
+line numbers.)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In restructured text input, \[lq]bird track\[rq] sections will be parsed
+as Haskell code.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In restructured text output, code blocks with class \f[CR]haskell\f[R]
+will be rendered using bird tracks.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In LaTeX input, text in \f[CR]code\f[R] environments will be parsed as
+Haskell code.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In LaTeX output, code blocks with class \f[CR]haskell\f[R] will be
+rendered inside \f[CR]code\f[R] environments.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In HTML output, code blocks with class \f[CR]haskell\f[R] will be
+rendered with class \f[CR]literatehaskell\f[R] and bird tracks.
+.PP
+Examples:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html
+.EE
+.PP
+reads literate Haskell source formatted with Markdown conventions and
+writes ordinary HTML (without bird tracks).
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -f markdown+lhs -t html+lhs
+.EE
+.PP
+writes HTML with the Haskell code in bird tracks, so it can be copied
+and pasted as literate Haskell source.
+.PP
+Note that GHC expects the bird tracks in the first column, so indented
+literate code blocks (e.g.\ inside an itemized environment) will not be
+picked up by the Haskell compiler.
+.SS Other extensions
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]empty_paragraphs\f[R]
+Allows empty paragraphs.
+By default empty paragraphs are omitted.
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+input formats
+\f[CR]docx\f[R], \f[CR]html\f[R]
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]docx\f[R], \f[CR]odt\f[R], \f[CR]opendocument\f[R],
+\f[CR]html\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]native_numbering\f[R]
+Enables native numbering of figures and tables.
+Enumeration starts at 1.
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]odt\f[R], \f[CR]opendocument\f[R], \f[CR]docx\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]xrefs_name\f[R]
+Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
+substituted with cross-references that will use the name or caption of
+the referenced item.
+The original link text is replaced once the generated document is
+refreshed.
+This extension can be combined with \f[CR]xrefs_number\f[R] in which
+case numbers will appear before the name.
+.PP
+Text in cross-references is only made consistent with the referenced
+item once the document has been refreshed.
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]odt\f[R], \f[CR]opendocument\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]xrefs_number\f[R]
+Links to headings, figures and tables inside the document are
+substituted with cross-references that will use the number of the
+referenced item.
+The original link text is discarded.
+This extension can be combined with \f[CR]xrefs_name\f[R] in which case
+the name or caption numbers will appear after the number.
+.PP
+For the \f[CR]xrefs_number\f[R] to be useful heading numbers must be
+enabled in the generated document, also table and figure captions must
+be enabled using for example the \f[CR]native_numbering\f[R] extension.
+.PP
+Numbers in cross-references are only visible in the final document once
+it has been refreshed.
+.PP
+This extension can be enabled/disabled for the following formats:
+.TP
+output formats
+\f[CR]odt\f[R], \f[CR]opendocument\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]styles\f[R]
+When converting from docx, read all docx styles as divs (for paragraph
+styles) and spans (for character styles) regardless of whether pandoc
+understands the meaning of these styles.
+This can be used with docx custom styles.
+Disabled by default.
+.TP
+input formats
+\f[CR]docx\f[R]
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]amuse\f[R]
+In the \f[CR]muse\f[R] input format, this enables Text::Amuse extensions
+to Emacs Muse markup.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]raw_markdown\f[R]
+In the \f[CR]ipynb\f[R] input format, this causes Markdown cells to be
+included as raw Markdown blocks (allowing lossless round-tripping)
+rather than being parsed.
+Use this only when you are targeting \f[CR]ipynb\f[R] or a
+markdown-based output format.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]citations\f[R]
+When the \f[CR]citations\f[R] extension is enabled in \f[CR]org\f[R],
+org-cite and org-ref style citations will be parsed as native pandoc
+citations.
+.PP
+When \f[CR]citations\f[R] is enabled in \f[CR]docx\f[R], citations
+inserted by Zotero or Mendeley or EndNote plugins will be parsed as
+native pandoc citations.
+(Otherwise, the formatted citations generated by the bibliographic
+software will be parsed as regular text.)
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]fancy_lists\f[R]
+Some aspects of Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown fancy lists are also accepted in
+\f[CR]org\f[R] input, mimicking the option
+\f[CR]org-list-allow-alphabetical\f[R] in Emacs.
+As in Org Mode, enabling this extension allows lowercase and uppercase
+alphabetical markers for ordered lists to be parsed in addition to
+arabic ones.
+Note that for Org, this does not include roman numerals or the
+\f[CR]#\f[R] placeholder that are enabled by the extension in
+Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]element_citations\f[R]
+In the \f[CR]jats\f[R] output formats, this causes reference items to be
+replaced with \f[CR]<element-citation>\f[R] elements.
+These elements are not influenced by CSL styles, but all information on
+the item is included in tags.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]ntb\f[R]
+In the \f[CR]context\f[R] output format this enables the use of Natural
+Tables (TABLE) instead of the default Extreme Tables (xtables).
+Natural tables allow more fine-grained global customization but come at
+a performance penalty compared to extreme tables.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]tagging\f[R]
+Enabling this extension with \f[CR]context\f[R] output will produce
+markup suitable for the production of tagged PDFs.
+This includes additional markers for paragraphs and alternative markup
+for emphasized text.
+The \f[CR]emphasis-command\f[R] template variable is set if the
+extension is enabled.
+.SH PANDOC\[cq]S MARKDOWN
+Pandoc understands an extended and slightly revised version of John
+Gruber\[cq]s Markdown syntax.
+This document explains the syntax, noting differences from original
+Markdown.
+Except where noted, these differences can be suppressed by using the
+\f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] format instead of \f[CR]markdown\f[R].
+Extensions can be enabled or disabled to specify the behavior more
+granularly.
+They are described in the following.
+See also Extensions above, for extensions that work also on other
+formats.
+.SS Philosophy
+Markdown is designed to be easy to write, and, even more importantly,
+easy to read:
+.RS
+.PP
+A Markdown-formatted document should be publishable as-is, as plain
+text, without looking like it\[cq]s been marked up with tags or
+formatting instructions.
+\[en] John Gruber
+.RE
+.PP
+This principle has guided pandoc\[cq]s decisions in finding syntax for
+tables, footnotes, and other extensions.
+.PP
+There is, however, one respect in which pandoc\[cq]s aims are different
+from the original aims of Markdown.
+Whereas Markdown was originally designed with HTML generation in mind,
+pandoc is designed for multiple output formats.
+Thus, while pandoc allows the embedding of raw HTML, it discourages it,
+and provides other, non-HTMLish ways of representing important document
+elements like definition lists, tables, mathematics, and footnotes.
+.SS Paragraphs
+A paragraph is one or more lines of text followed by one or more blank
+lines.
+Newlines are treated as spaces, so you can reflow your paragraphs as you
+like.
+If you need a hard line break, put two or more spaces at the end of a
+line.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]escaped_line_breaks\f[R]
+A backslash followed by a newline is also a hard line break.
+Note: in multiline and grid table cells, this is the only way to create
+a hard line break, since trailing spaces in the cells are ignored.
+.SS Headings
+There are two kinds of headings: Setext and ATX.
+.SS Setext-style headings
+A setext-style heading is a line of text \[lq]underlined\[rq] with a row
+of \f[CR]=\f[R] signs (for a level-one heading) or \f[CR]-\f[R] signs
+(for a level-two heading):
+.IP
+.EX
+A level-one heading
+===================
+
+A level-two heading
+-------------------
+.EE
+.PP
+The heading text can contain inline formatting, such as emphasis (see
+Inline formatting, below).
+.SS ATX-style headings
+An ATX-style heading consists of one to six \f[CR]#\f[R] signs and a
+line of text, optionally followed by any number of \f[CR]#\f[R] signs.
+The number of \f[CR]#\f[R] signs at the beginning of the line is the
+heading level:
+.IP
+.EX
+## A level-two heading
+
+### A level-three heading ###
+.EE
+.PP
+As with setext-style headings, the heading text can contain formatting:
+.IP
+.EX
+# A level-one heading with a [link](/url) and *emphasis*
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]blank_before_header\f[R]
+Original Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a heading.
+Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
+document).
+The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
+\f[CR]#\f[R] to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
+through line wrapping).
+Consider, for example:
+.IP
+.EX
+I like several of their flavors of ice cream:
+#22, for example, and #5.
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]space_in_atx_header\f[R]
+Many Markdown implementations do not require a space between the opening
+\f[CR]#\f[R]s of an ATX heading and the heading text, so that
+\f[CR]#5 bolt\f[R] and \f[CR]#hashtag\f[R] count as headings.
+With this extension, pandoc does require the space.
+.SS Heading identifiers
+See also the \f[CR]auto_identifiers\f[R] extension above.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]header_attributes\f[R]
+Headings can be assigned attributes using this syntax at the end of the
+line containing the heading text:
+.IP
+.EX
+{#identifier .class .class key=value key=value}
+.EE
+.PP
+Thus, for example, the following headings will all be assigned the
+identifier \f[CR]foo\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+# My heading {#foo}
+
+## My heading ##    {#foo}
+
+My other heading   {#foo}
+---------------
+.EE
+.PP
+(This syntax is compatible with PHP Markdown Extra.)
+.PP
+Note that although this syntax allows assignment of classes and
+key/value attributes, writers generally don\[cq]t use all of this
+information.
+Identifiers, classes, and key/value attributes are used in HTML and
+HTML-based formats such as EPUB and slidy.
+Identifiers are used for labels and link anchors in the LaTeX, ConTeXt,
+Textile, Jira markup, and AsciiDoc writers.
+.PP
+Headings with the class \f[CR]unnumbered\f[R] will not be numbered, even
+if \f[CR]--number-sections\f[R] is specified.
+A single hyphen (\f[CR]-\f[R]) in an attribute context is equivalent to
+\f[CR].unnumbered\f[R], and preferable in non-English documents.
+So,
+.IP
+.EX
+# My heading {-}
+.EE
+.PP
+is just the same as
+.IP
+.EX
+# My heading {.unnumbered}
+.EE
+.PP
+If the \f[CR]unlisted\f[R] class is present in addition to
+\f[CR]unnumbered\f[R], the heading will not be included in a table of
+contents.
+(Currently this feature is only implemented for certain formats: those
+based on LaTeX and HTML, PowerPoint, and RTF.)
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]implicit_header_references\f[R]
+Pandoc behaves as if reference links have been defined for each heading.
+So, to link to a heading
+.IP
+.EX
+# Heading identifiers in HTML
+.EE
+.PP
+you can simply write
+.IP
+.EX
+[Heading identifiers in HTML]
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+[Heading identifiers in HTML][]
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+[the section on heading identifiers][heading identifiers in
+HTML]
+.EE
+.PP
+instead of giving the identifier explicitly:
+.IP
+.EX
+[Heading identifiers in HTML](#heading-identifiers-in-html)
+.EE
+.PP
+If there are multiple headings with identical text, the corresponding
+reference will link to the first one only, and you will need to use
+explicit links to link to the others, as described above.
+.PP
+Like regular reference links, these references are case-insensitive.
+.PP
+Explicit link reference definitions always take priority over implicit
+heading references.
+So, in the following example, the link will point to \f[CR]bar\f[R], not
+to \f[CR]#foo\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+# Foo
+
+[foo]: bar
+
+See [foo]
+.EE
+.SS Block quotations
+Markdown uses email conventions for quoting blocks of text.
+A block quotation is one or more paragraphs or other block elements
+(such as lists or headings), with each line preceded by a \f[CR]>\f[R]
+character and an optional space.
+(The \f[CR]>\f[R] need not start at the left margin, but it should not
+be indented more than three spaces.)
+.IP
+.EX
+> This is a block quote. This
+> paragraph has two lines.
+>
+> 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
+> 2. Second item.
+.EE
+.PP
+A \[lq]lazy\[rq] form, which requires the \f[CR]>\f[R] character only on
+the first line of each block, is also allowed:
+.IP
+.EX
+> This is a block quote. This
+paragraph has two lines.
+
+> 1. This is a list inside a block quote.
+2. Second item.
+.EE
+.PP
+Among the block elements that can be contained in a block quote are
+other block quotes.
+That is, block quotes can be nested:
+.IP
+.EX
+> This is a block quote.
+>
+> > A block quote within a block quote.
+.EE
+.PP
+If the \f[CR]>\f[R] character is followed by an optional space, that
+space will be considered part of the block quote marker and not part of
+the indentation of the contents.
+Thus, to put an indented code block in a block quote, you need five
+spaces after the \f[CR]>\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+>     code
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]blank_before_blockquote\f[R]
+Original Markdown syntax does not require a blank line before a block
+quote.
+Pandoc does require this (except, of course, at the beginning of the
+document).
+The reason for the requirement is that it is all too easy for a
+\f[CR]>\f[R] to end up at the beginning of a line by accident (perhaps
+through line wrapping).
+So, unless the \f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] format is used, the following
+does not produce a nested block quote in pandoc:
+.IP
+.EX
+> This is a block quote.
+>> Not nested, since \[ga]blank_before_blockquote\[ga] is enabled by default
+.EE
+.SS Verbatim (code) blocks
+.SS Indented code blocks
+A block of text indented four spaces (or one tab) is treated as verbatim
+text: that is, special characters do not trigger special formatting, and
+all spaces and line breaks are preserved.
+For example,
+.IP
+.EX
+    if (a > 3) {
+      moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
+    }
+.EE
+.PP
+The initial (four space or one tab) indentation is not considered part
+of the verbatim text, and is removed in the output.
+.PP
+Note: blank lines in the verbatim text need not begin with four spaces.
+.SS Fenced code blocks
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]fenced_code_blocks\f[R]
+In addition to standard indented code blocks, pandoc supports
+\f[I]fenced\f[R] code blocks.
+These begin with a row of three or more tildes (\f[CR]\[ti]\f[R]) and
+end with a row of tildes that must be at least as long as the starting
+row.
+Everything between these lines is treated as code.
+No indentation is necessary:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+if (a > 3) {
+  moveShip(5 * gravity, DOWN);
+}
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+.EE
+.PP
+Like regular code blocks, fenced code blocks must be separated from
+surrounding text by blank lines.
+.PP
+If the code itself contains a row of tildes or backticks, just use a
+longer row of tildes or backticks at the start and end:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+code including tildes
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]backtick_code_blocks\f[R]
+Same as \f[CR]fenced_code_blocks\f[R], but uses backticks
+(\f[CR]\[ga]\f[R]) instead of tildes (\f[CR]\[ti]\f[R]).
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]fenced_code_attributes\f[R]
+Optionally, you may attach attributes to fenced or backtick code block
+using this syntax:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti] {#mycode .haskell .numberLines startFrom=\[dq]100\[dq]}
+qsort []     = []
+qsort (x:xs) = qsort (filter (< x) xs) ++ [x] ++
+               qsort (filter (>= x) xs)
+\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]\[ti]
+.EE
+.PP
+Here \f[CR]mycode\f[R] is an identifier, \f[CR]haskell\f[R] and
+\f[CR]numberLines\f[R] are classes, and \f[CR]startFrom\f[R] is an
+attribute with value \f[CR]100\f[R].
+Some output formats can use this information to do syntax highlighting.
+Currently, the only output formats that use this information are HTML,
+LaTeX, Docx, Ms, and PowerPoint.
+If highlighting is supported for your output format and language, then
+the code block above will appear highlighted, with numbered lines.
+(To see which languages are supported, type
+\f[CR]pandoc --list-highlight-languages\f[R].)
+Otherwise, the code block above will appear as follows:
+.IP
+.EX
+<pre id=\[dq]mycode\[dq] class=\[dq]haskell numberLines\[dq] startFrom=\[dq]100\[dq]>
+  <code>
+  ...
+  </code>
+</pre>
+.EE
+.PP
+The \f[CR]numberLines\f[R] (or \f[CR]number-lines\f[R]) class will cause
+the lines of the code block to be numbered, starting with \f[CR]1\f[R]
+or the value of the \f[CR]startFrom\f[R] attribute.
+The \f[CR]lineAnchors\f[R] (or \f[CR]line-anchors\f[R]) class will cause
+the lines to be clickable anchors in HTML output.
+.PP
+A shortcut form can also be used for specifying the language of the code
+block:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]haskell
+qsort [] = []
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+This is equivalent to:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] {.haskell}
+qsort [] = []
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+This shortcut form may be combined with attributes:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]haskell {.numberLines}
+qsort [] = []
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+Which is equivalent to:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] {.haskell .numberLines}
+qsort [] = []
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+If the \f[CR]fenced_code_attributes\f[R] extension is disabled, but
+input contains class attribute(s) for the code block, the first class
+attribute will be printed after the opening fence as a bare word.
+.PP
+To prevent all highlighting, use the \f[CR]--no-highlight\f[R] flag.
+To set the highlighting style, use \f[CR]--highlight-style\f[R].
+For more information on highlighting, see Syntax highlighting, below.
+.SS Line blocks
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]line_blocks\f[R]
+A line block is a sequence of lines beginning with a vertical bar
+(\f[CR]|\f[R]) followed by a space.
+The division into lines will be preserved in the output, as will any
+leading spaces; otherwise, the lines will be formatted as Markdown.
+This is useful for verse and addresses:
+.IP
+.EX
+| The limerick packs laughs anatomical
+| In space that is quite economical.
+|    But the good ones I\[aq]ve seen
+|    So seldom are clean
+| And the clean ones so seldom are comical
+
+| 200 Main St.
+| Berkeley, CA 94718
+.EE
+.PP
+The lines can be hard-wrapped if needed, but the continuation line must
+begin with a space.
+.IP
+.EX
+| The Right Honorable Most Venerable and Righteous Samuel L.
+  Constable, Jr.
+| 200 Main St.
+| Berkeley, CA 94718
+.EE
+.PP
+Inline formatting (such as emphasis) is allowed in the content (though
+it can\[cq]t cross line boundaries).
+Block-level formatting (such as block quotes or lists) is not
+recognized.
+.PP
+This syntax is borrowed from reStructuredText.
+.SS Lists
+.SS Bullet lists
+A bullet list is a list of bulleted list items.
+A bulleted list item begins with a bullet (\f[CR]*\f[R], \f[CR]+\f[R],
+or \f[CR]-\f[R]).
+Here is a simple example:
+.IP
+.EX
+* one
+* two
+* three
+.EE
+.PP
+This will produce a \[lq]compact\[rq] list.
+If you want a \[lq]loose\[rq] list, in which each item is formatted as a
+paragraph, put spaces between the items:
+.IP
+.EX
+* one
+
+* two
+
+* three
+.EE
+.PP
+The bullets need not be flush with the left margin; they may be indented
+one, two, or three spaces.
+The bullet must be followed by whitespace.
+.PP
+List items look best if subsequent lines are flush with the first line
+(after the bullet):
+.IP
+.EX
+* here is my first
+  list item.
+* and my second.
+.EE
+.PP
+But Markdown also allows a \[lq]lazy\[rq] format:
+.IP
+.EX
+* here is my first
+list item.
+* and my second.
+.EE
+.SS Block content in list items
+A list item may contain multiple paragraphs and other block-level
+content.
+However, subsequent paragraphs must be preceded by a blank line and
+indented to line up with the first non-space content after the list
+marker.
+.IP
+.EX
+  * First paragraph.
+
+    Continued.
+
+  * Second paragraph. With a code block, which must be indented
+    eight spaces:
+
+        { code }
+.EE
+.PP
+Exception: if the list marker is followed by an indented code block,
+which must begin 5 spaces after the list marker, then subsequent
+paragraphs must begin two columns after the last character of the list
+marker:
+.IP
+.EX
+*     code
+
+  continuation paragraph
+.EE
+.PP
+List items may include other lists.
+In this case the preceding blank line is optional.
+The nested list must be indented to line up with the first non-space
+character after the list marker of the containing list item.
+.IP
+.EX
+* fruits
+  + apples
+    - macintosh
+    - red delicious
+  + pears
+  + peaches
+* vegetables
+  + broccoli
+  + chard
+.EE
+.PP
+As noted above, Markdown allows you to write list items
+\[lq]lazily,\[rq] instead of indenting continuation lines.
+However, if there are multiple paragraphs or other blocks in a list
+item, the first line of each must be indented.
+.IP
+.EX
++ A lazy, lazy, list
+item.
+
++ Another one; this looks
+bad but is legal.
+
+    Second paragraph of second
+list item.
+.EE
+.SS Ordered lists
+Ordered lists work just like bulleted lists, except that the items begin
+with enumerators rather than bullets.
+.PP
+In original Markdown, enumerators are decimal numbers followed by a
+period and a space.
+The numbers themselves are ignored, so there is no difference between
+this list:
+.IP
+.EX
+1.  one
+2.  two
+3.  three
+.EE
+.PP
+and this one:
+.IP
+.EX
+5.  one
+7.  two
+1.  three
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]fancy_lists\f[R]
+Unlike original Markdown, pandoc allows ordered list items to be marked
+with uppercase and lowercase letters and roman numerals, in addition to
+Arabic numerals.
+List markers may be enclosed in parentheses or followed by a single
+right-parenthesis or period.
+They must be separated from the text that follows by at least one space,
+and, if the list marker is a capital letter with a period, by at least
+two spaces.
+.PP
+The \f[CR]fancy_lists\f[R] extension also allows `\f[CR]#\f[R]' to be
+used as an ordered list marker in place of a numeral:
+.IP
+.EX
+#. one
+#. two
+.EE
+.PP
+Note: the `\f[CR]#\f[R]' ordered list marker doesn\[cq]t work with
+\f[CR]commonmark\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]startnum\f[R]
+Pandoc also pays attention to the type of list marker used, and to the
+starting number, and both of these are preserved where possible in the
+output format.
+Thus, the following yields a list with numbers followed by a single
+parenthesis, starting with 9, and a sublist with lowercase roman
+numerals:
+.IP
+.EX
+ 9)  Ninth
+10)  Tenth
+11)  Eleventh
+       i. subone
+      ii. subtwo
+     iii. subthree
+.EE
+.PP
+Pandoc will start a new list each time a different type of list marker
+is used.
+So, the following will create three lists:
+.IP
+.EX
+(2) Two
+(5) Three
+1.  Four
+*   Five
+.EE
+.PP
+If default list markers are desired, use \f[CR]#.\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+#.  one
+#.  two
+#.  three
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]task_lists\f[R]
+Pandoc supports task lists, using the syntax of GitHub-Flavored
+Markdown.
+.IP
+.EX
+- [ ] an unchecked task list item
+- [x] checked item
+.EE
+.SS Definition lists
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]definition_lists\f[R]
+Pandoc supports definition lists, using the syntax of PHP Markdown Extra
+with some extensions.
+.IP
+.EX
+Term 1
+
+:   Definition 1
+
+Term 2 with *inline markup*
+
+:   Definition 2
+
+        { some code, part of Definition 2 }
+
+    Third paragraph of definition 2.
+.EE
+.PP
+Each term must fit on one line, which may optionally be followed by a
+blank line, and must be followed by one or more definitions.
+A definition begins with a colon or tilde, which may be indented one or
+two spaces.
+.PP
+A term may have multiple definitions, and each definition may consist of
+one or more block elements (paragraph, code block, list, etc.), each
+indented four spaces or one tab stop.
+The body of the definition (not including the first line) should be
+indented four spaces.
+However, as with other Markdown lists, you can \[lq]lazily\[rq] omit
+indentation except at the beginning of a paragraph or other block
+element:
+.IP
+.EX
+Term 1
+
+:   Definition
+with lazy continuation.
+
+    Second paragraph of the definition.
+.EE
+.PP
+If you leave space before the definition (as in the example above), the
+text of the definition will be treated as a paragraph.
+In some output formats, this will mean greater spacing between
+term/definition pairs.
+For a more compact definition list, omit the space before the
+definition:
+.IP
+.EX
+Term 1
+  \[ti] Definition 1
+
+Term 2
+  \[ti] Definition 2a
+  \[ti] Definition 2b
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that space between items in a definition list is required.
+(A variant that loosens this requirement, but disallows \[lq]lazy\[rq]
+hard wrapping, can be activated with the
+\f[CR]compact_definition_lists\f[R] extension.)
+.SS Numbered example lists
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]example_lists\f[R]
+The special list marker \f[CR]\[at]\f[R] can be used for sequentially
+numbered examples.
+The first list item with a \f[CR]\[at]\f[R] marker will be numbered `1',
+the next `2', and so on, throughout the document.
+The numbered examples need not occur in a single list; each new list
+using \f[CR]\[at]\f[R] will take up where the last stopped.
+So, for example:
+.IP
+.EX
+(\[at])  My first example will be numbered (1).
+(\[at])  My second example will be numbered (2).
+
+Explanation of examples.
+
+(\[at])  My third example will be numbered (3).
+.EE
+.PP
+Numbered examples can be labeled and referred to elsewhere in the
+document:
+.IP
+.EX
+(\[at]good)  This is a good example.
+
+As (\[at]good) illustrates, ...
+.EE
+.PP
+The label can be any string of alphanumeric characters, underscores, or
+hyphens.
+.PP
+Note: continuation paragraphs in example lists must always be indented
+four spaces, regardless of the length of the list marker.
+That is, example lists always behave as if the
+\f[CR]four_space_rule\f[R] extension is set.
+This is because example labels tend to be long, and indenting content to
+the first non-space character after the label would be awkward.
+.SS Ending a list
+What if you want to put an indented code block after a list?
+.IP
+.EX
+-   item one
+-   item two
+
+    { my code block }
+.EE
+.PP
+Trouble!
+Here pandoc (like other Markdown implementations) will treat
+\f[CR]{ my code block }\f[R] as the second paragraph of item two, and
+not as a code block.
+.PP
+To \[lq]cut off\[rq] the list after item two, you can insert some
+non-indented content, like an HTML comment, which won\[cq]t produce
+visible output in any format:
+.IP
+.EX
+-   item one
+-   item two
+
+<!-- end of list -->
+
+    { my code block }
+.EE
+.PP
+You can use the same trick if you want two consecutive lists instead of
+one big list:
+.IP
+.EX
+1.  one
+2.  two
+3.  three
+
+<!-- -->
+
+1.  uno
+2.  dos
+3.  tres
+.EE
+.SS Horizontal rules
+A line containing a row of three or more \f[CR]*\f[R], \f[CR]-\f[R], or
+\f[CR]_\f[R] characters (optionally separated by spaces) produces a
+horizontal rule:
+.IP
+.EX
+*  *  *  *
+
+---------------
+.EE
+.PP
+We strongly recommend that horizontal rules be separated from
+surrounding text by blank lines.
+If a horizontal rule is not followed by a blank line, pandoc may try to
+interpret the lines that follow as a YAML metadata block or a table.
+.SS Tables
+Four kinds of tables may be used.
+The first three kinds presuppose the use of a fixed-width font, such as
+Courier.
+The fourth kind can be used with proportionally spaced fonts, as it does
+not require lining up columns.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]table_captions\f[R]
+A caption may optionally be provided with all 4 kinds of tables (as
+illustrated in the examples below).
+A caption is a paragraph beginning with the string \f[CR]Table:\f[R] (or
+\f[CR]table:\f[R] or just \f[CR]:\f[R]), which will be stripped off.
+It may appear either before or after the table.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]simple_tables\f[R]
+Simple tables look like this:
+.IP
+.EX
+  Right     Left     Center     Default
+-------     ------ ----------   -------
+     12     12        12            12
+    123     123       123          123
+      1     1          1             1
+
+Table:  Demonstration of simple table syntax.
+.EE
+.PP
+The header and table rows must each fit on one line.
+Column alignments are determined by the position of the header text
+relative to the dashed line below it:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the right side but
+extends beyond it on the left, the column is right-aligned.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the dashed line is flush with the header text on the left side but
+extends beyond it on the right, the column is left-aligned.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the dashed line extends beyond the header text on both sides, the
+column is centered.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+If the dashed line is flush with the header text on both sides, the
+default alignment is used (in most cases, this will be left).
+.PP
+The table must end with a blank line, or a line of dashes followed by a
+blank line.
+.PP
+The column header row may be omitted, provided a dashed line is used to
+end the table.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+-------     ------ ----------   -------
+     12     12        12             12
+    123     123       123           123
+      1     1          1              1
+-------     ------ ----------   -------
+.EE
+.PP
+When the header row is omitted, column alignments are determined on the
+basis of the first line of the table body.
+So, in the tables above, the columns would be right, left, center, and
+right aligned, respectively.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]multiline_tables\f[R]
+Multiline tables allow header and table rows to span multiple lines of
+text (but cells that span multiple columns or rows of the table are not
+supported).
+Here is an example:
+.IP
+.EX
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+ Centered   Default           Right Left
+  Header    Aligned         Aligned Aligned
+----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
+   First    row                12.0 Example of a row that
+                                    spans multiple lines.
+
+  Second    row                 5.0 Here\[aq]s another one. Note
+                                    the blank line between
+                                    rows.
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Table: Here\[aq]s the caption. It, too, may span
+multiple lines.
+.EE
+.PP
+These work like simple tables, but with the following differences:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+They must begin with a row of dashes, before the header text (unless the
+header row is omitted).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+They must end with a row of dashes, then a blank line.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+The rows must be separated by blank lines.
+.PP
+In multiline tables, the table parser pays attention to the widths of
+the columns, and the writers try to reproduce these relative widths in
+the output.
+So, if you find that one of the columns is too narrow in the output, try
+widening it in the Markdown source.
+.PP
+The header may be omitted in multiline tables as well as simple tables:
+.IP
+.EX
+----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
+   First    row                12.0 Example of a row that
+                                    spans multiple lines.
+
+  Second    row                 5.0 Here\[aq]s another one. Note
+                                    the blank line between
+                                    rows.
+----------- ------- --------------- -------------------------
+
+: Here\[aq]s a multiline table without a header.
+.EE
+.PP
+It is possible for a multiline table to have just one row, but the row
+should be followed by a blank line (and then the row of dashes that ends
+the table), or the table may be interpreted as a simple table.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]grid_tables\f[R]
+Grid tables look like this:
+.IP
+.EX
+: Sample grid table.
+
++---------------+---------------+--------------------+
+| Fruit         | Price         | Advantages         |
++===============+===============+====================+
+| Bananas       | $1.34         | - built-in wrapper |
+|               |               | - bright color     |
++---------------+---------------+--------------------+
+| Oranges       | $2.10         | - cures scurvy     |
+|               |               | - tasty            |
++---------------+---------------+--------------------+
+.EE
+.PP
+The row of \f[CR]=\f[R]s separates the header from the table body, and
+can be omitted for a headerless table.
+The cells of grid tables may contain arbitrary block elements (multiple
+paragraphs, code blocks, lists, etc.).
+.PP
+Cells can span multiple columns or rows:
+.IP
+.EX
++---------------------+----------+
+| Property            | Earth    |
++=============+=======+==========+
+|             | min   | -89.2 °C |
+| Temperature +-------+----------+
+| 1961-1990   | mean  | 14 °C    |
+|             +-------+----------+
+|             | max   | 56.7 °C  |
++-------------+-------+----------+
+.EE
+.PP
+A table header may contain more than one row:
+.IP
+.EX
++---------------------+-----------------------+
+| Location            | Temperature 1961-1990 |
+|                     | in degree Celsius     |
+|                     +-------+-------+-------+
+|                     | min   | mean  | max   |
++=====================+=======+=======+=======+
+| Antarctica          | -89.2 | N/A   | 19.8  |
++---------------------+-------+-------+-------+
+| Earth               | -89.2 | 14    | 56.7  |
++---------------------+-------+-------+-------+
+.EE
+.PP
+Alignments can be specified as with pipe tables, by putting colons at
+the boundaries of the separator line after the header:
+.IP
+.EX
++---------------+---------------+--------------------+
+| Right         | Left          | Centered           |
++==============:+:==============+:==================:+
+| Bananas       | $1.34         | built-in wrapper   |
++---------------+---------------+--------------------+
+.EE
+.PP
+For headerless tables, the colons go on the top line instead:
+.IP
+.EX
++--------------:+:--------------+:------------------:+
+| Right         | Left          | Centered           |
++---------------+---------------+--------------------+
+.EE
+.PP
+A table foot can be defined by enclosing it with separator lines that
+use \f[CR]=\f[R] instead of \f[CR]-\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+ +---------------+---------------+
+ | Fruit         | Price         |
+ +===============+===============+
+ | Bananas       | $1.34         |
+ +---------------+---------------+
+ | Oranges       | $2.10         |
+ +===============+===============+
+ | Sum           | $3.44         |
+ +===============+===============+
+.EE
+.PP
+The foot must always be placed at the very bottom of the table.
+.PP
+Grid tables can be created easily using Emacs\[cq] table-mode
+(\f[CR]M-x table-insert\f[R]).
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]pipe_tables\f[R]
+Pipe tables look like this:
+.IP
+.EX
+| Right | Left | Default | Center |
+|------:|:-----|---------|:------:|
+|   12  |  12  |    12   |    12  |
+|  123  |  123 |   123   |   123  |
+|    1  |    1 |     1   |     1  |
+
+  : Demonstration of pipe table syntax.
+.EE
+.PP
+The syntax is identical to PHP Markdown Extra tables.
+The beginning and ending pipe characters are optional, but pipes are
+required between all columns.
+The colons indicate column alignment as shown.
+The header cannot be omitted.
+To simulate a headerless table, include a header with blank cells.
+.PP
+Since the pipes indicate column boundaries, columns need not be
+vertically aligned, as they are in the above example.
+So, this is a perfectly legal (though ugly) pipe table:
+.IP
+.EX
+fruit| price
+-----|-----:
+apple|2.05
+pear|1.37
+orange|3.09
+.EE
+.PP
+The cells of pipe tables cannot contain block elements like paragraphs
+and lists, and cannot span multiple lines.
+If any line of the markdown source is longer than the column width (see
+\f[CR]--columns\f[R]), then the table will take up the full text width
+and the cell contents will wrap, with the relative cell widths
+determined by the number of dashes in the line separating the table
+header from the table body.
+(For example \f[CR]---|-\f[R] would make the first column 3/4 and the
+second column 1/4 of the full text width.)
+On the other hand, if no lines are wider than column width, then cell
+contents will not be wrapped, and the cells will be sized to their
+contents.
+.PP
+Note: pandoc also recognizes pipe tables of the following form, as can
+be produced by Emacs\[cq] orgtbl-mode:
+.IP
+.EX
+| One | Two   |
+|-----+-------|
+| my  | table |
+| is  | nice  |
+.EE
+.PP
+The difference is that \f[CR]+\f[R] is used instead of \f[CR]|\f[R].
+Other orgtbl features are not supported.
+In particular, to get non-default column alignment, you\[cq]ll need to
+add colons as above.
+.SS Metadata blocks
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]pandoc_title_block\f[R]
+If the file begins with a title block
+.IP
+.EX
+% title
+% author(s) (separated by semicolons)
+% date
+.EE
+.PP
+it will be parsed as bibliographic information, not regular text.
+(It will be used, for example, in the title of standalone LaTeX or HTML
+output.)
+The block may contain just a title, a title and an author, or all three
+elements.
+If you want to include an author but no title, or a title and a date but
+no author, you need a blank line:
+.IP
+.EX
+%
+% Author
+.EE
+.IP
+.EX
+% My title
+%
+% June 15, 2006
+.EE
+.PP
+The title may occupy multiple lines, but continuation lines must begin
+with leading space, thus:
+.IP
+.EX
+% My title
+  on multiple lines
+.EE
+.PP
+If a document has multiple authors, the authors may be put on separate
+lines with leading space, or separated by semicolons, or both.
+So, all of the following are equivalent:
+.IP
+.EX
+% Author One
+  Author Two
+.EE
+.IP
+.EX
+% Author One; Author Two
+.EE
+.IP
+.EX
+% Author One;
+  Author Two
+.EE
+.PP
+The date must fit on one line.
+.PP
+All three metadata fields may contain standard inline formatting
+(italics, links, footnotes, etc.).
+.PP
+Title blocks will always be parsed, but they will affect the output only
+when the \f[CR]--standalone\f[R] (\f[CR]-s\f[R]) option is chosen.
+In HTML output, titles will appear twice: once in the document head
+\[en] this is the title that will appear at the top of the window in a
+browser \[en] and once at the beginning of the document body.
+The title in the document head can have an optional prefix attached
+(\f[CR]--title-prefix\f[R] or \f[CR]-T\f[R] option).
+The title in the body appears as an H1 element with class
+\[lq]title\[rq], so it can be suppressed or reformatted with CSS.
+If a title prefix is specified with \f[CR]-T\f[R] and no title block
+appears in the document, the title prefix will be used by itself as the
+HTML title.
+.PP
+The man page writer extracts a title, man page section number, and other
+header and footer information from the title line.
+The title is assumed to be the first word on the title line, which may
+optionally end with a (single-digit) section number in parentheses.
+(There should be no space between the title and the parentheses.)
+Anything after this is assumed to be additional footer and header text.
+A single pipe character (\f[CR]|\f[R]) should be used to separate the
+footer text from the header text.
+Thus,
+.IP
+.EX
+% PANDOC(1)
+.EE
+.PP
+will yield a man page with the title \f[CR]PANDOC\f[R] and section 1.
+.IP
+.EX
+% PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals
+.EE
+.PP
+will also have \[lq]Pandoc User Manuals\[rq] in the footer.
+.IP
+.EX
+% PANDOC(1) Pandoc User Manuals | Version 4.0
+.EE
+.PP
+will also have \[lq]Version 4.0\[rq] in the header.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]yaml_metadata_block\f[R]
+A YAML metadata block is a valid YAML object, delimited by a line of
+three hyphens (\f[CR]---\f[R]) at the top and a line of three hyphens
+(\f[CR]---\f[R]) or three dots (\f[CR]...\f[R]) at the bottom.
+The initial line \f[CR]---\f[R] must not be followed by a blank line.
+A YAML metadata block may occur anywhere in the document, but if it is
+not at the beginning, it must be preceded by a blank line.
+.PP
+Note that, because of the way pandoc concatenates input files when
+several are provided, you may also keep the metadata in a separate YAML
+file and pass it to pandoc as an argument, along with your Markdown
+files:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc chap1.md chap2.md chap3.md metadata.yaml -s -o book.html
+.EE
+.PP
+Just be sure that the YAML file begins with \f[CR]---\f[R] and ends with
+\f[CR]---\f[R] or \f[CR]...\f[R].
+Alternatively, you can use the \f[CR]--metadata-file\f[R] option.
+Using that approach however, you cannot reference content (like
+footnotes) from the main markdown input document.
+.PP
+Metadata will be taken from the fields of the YAML object and added to
+any existing document metadata.
+Metadata can contain lists and objects (nested arbitrarily), but all
+string scalars will be interpreted as Markdown.
+Fields with names ending in an underscore will be ignored by pandoc.
+(They may be given a role by external processors.)
+Field names must not be interpretable as YAML numbers or boolean values
+(so, for example, \f[CR]yes\f[R], \f[CR]True\f[R], and \f[CR]15\f[R]
+cannot be used as field names).
+.PP
+A document may contain multiple metadata blocks.
+If two metadata blocks attempt to set the same field, the value from the
+second block will be taken.
+.PP
+Each metadata block is handled internally as an independent YAML
+document.
+This means, for example, that any YAML anchors defined in a block cannot
+be referenced in another block.
+.PP
+When pandoc is used with \f[CR]-t markdown\f[R] to create a Markdown
+document, a YAML metadata block will be produced only if the
+\f[CR]-s/--standalone\f[R] option is used.
+All of the metadata will appear in a single block at the beginning of
+the document.
+.PP
+Note that YAML escaping rules must be followed.
+Thus, for example, if a title contains a colon, it must be quoted, and
+if it contains a backslash escape, then it must be ensured that it is
+not treated as a YAML escape sequence.
+The pipe character (\f[CR]|\f[R]) can be used to begin an indented block
+that will be interpreted literally, without need for escaping.
+This form is necessary when the field contains blank lines or
+block-level formatting:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+title:  \[aq]This is the title: it contains a colon\[aq]
+author:
+- Author One
+- Author Two
+keywords: [nothing, nothingness]
+abstract: |
+  This is the abstract.
+
+  It consists of two paragraphs.
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+The literal block after the \f[CR]|\f[R] must be indented relative to
+the line containing the \f[CR]|\f[R].
+If it is not, the YAML will be invalid and pandoc will not interpret it
+as metadata.
+For an overview of the complex rules governing YAML, see the Wikipedia
+entry on YAML syntax.
+.PP
+Template variables will be set automatically from the metadata.
+Thus, for example, in writing HTML, the variable \f[CR]abstract\f[R]
+will be set to the HTML equivalent of the Markdown in the
+\f[CR]abstract\f[R] field:
+.IP
+.EX
+<p>This is the abstract.</p>
+<p>It consists of two paragraphs.</p>
+.EE
+.PP
+Variables can contain arbitrary YAML structures, but the template must
+match this structure.
+The \f[CR]author\f[R] variable in the default templates expects a simple
+list or string, but can be changed to support more complicated
+structures.
+The following combination, for example, would add an affiliation to the
+author if one is given:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+title: The document title
+author:
+- name: Author One
+  affiliation: University of Somewhere
+- name: Author Two
+  affiliation: University of Nowhere
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+To use the structured authors in the example above, you would need a
+custom template:
+.IP
+.EX
+$for(author)$
+$if(author.name)$
+$author.name$$if(author.affiliation)$ ($author.affiliation$)$endif$
+$else$
+$author$
+$endif$
+$endfor$
+.EE
+.PP
+Raw content to include in the document\[cq]s header may be specified
+using \f[CR]header-includes\f[R]; however, it is important to mark up
+this content as raw code for a particular output format, using the
+\f[CR]raw_attribute\f[R] extension, or it will be interpreted as
+markdown.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+header-includes:
+- |
+  \[ga]\[ga]\[ga]{=latex}
+  \[rs]let\[rs]oldsection\[rs]section
+  \[rs]renewcommand{\[rs]section}[1]{\[rs]clearpage\[rs]oldsection{#1}}
+  \[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+Note: the \f[CR]yaml_metadata_block\f[R] extension works with
+\f[CR]commonmark\f[R] as well as \f[CR]markdown\f[R] (and it is enabled
+by default in \f[CR]gfm\f[R] and \f[CR]commonmark_x\f[R]).
+However, in these formats the following restrictions apply:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+The YAML metadata block must occur at the beginning of the document (and
+there can be only one).
+If multiple files are given as arguments to pandoc, only the first can
+be a YAML metadata block.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+The leaf nodes of the YAML structure are parsed in isolation from each
+other and from the rest of the document.
+So, for example, you can\[cq]t use a reference link in these contexts if
+the link definition is somewhere else in the document.
+.SS Backslash escapes
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]all_symbols_escapable\f[R]
+Except inside a code block or inline code, any punctuation or space
+character preceded by a backslash will be treated literally, even if it
+would normally indicate formatting.
+Thus, for example, if one writes
+.IP
+.EX
+*\[rs]*hello\[rs]**
+.EE
+.PP
+one will get
+.IP
+.EX
+<em>*hello*</em>
+.EE
+.PP
+instead of
+.IP
+.EX
+<strong>hello</strong>
+.EE
+.PP
+This rule is easier to remember than original Markdown\[cq]s rule, which
+allows only the following characters to be backslash-escaped:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[rs]\[ga]*_{}[]()>#+-.!
+.EE
+.PP
+(However, if the \f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] format is used, the original
+Markdown rule will be used.)
+.PP
+A backslash-escaped space is parsed as a nonbreaking space.
+In TeX output, it will appear as \f[CR]\[ti]\f[R].
+In HTML and XML output, it will appear as a literal unicode nonbreaking
+space character (note that it will thus actually look
+\[lq]invisible\[rq] in the generated HTML source; you can still use the
+\f[CR]--ascii\f[R] command-line option to make it appear as an explicit
+entity).
+.PP
+A backslash-escaped newline (i.e.\ a backslash occurring at the end of a
+line) is parsed as a hard line break.
+It will appear in TeX output as \f[CR]\[rs]\[rs]\f[R] and in HTML as
+\f[CR]<br />\f[R].
+This is a nice alternative to Markdown\[cq]s \[lq]invisible\[rq] way of
+indicating hard line breaks using two trailing spaces on a line.
+.PP
+Backslash escapes do not work in verbatim contexts.
+.SS Inline formatting
+.SS Emphasis
+To \f[I]emphasize\f[R] some text, surround it with \f[CR]*\f[R]s or
+\f[CR]_\f[R], like this:
+.IP
+.EX
+This text is _emphasized with underscores_, and this
+is *emphasized with asterisks*.
+.EE
+.PP
+Double \f[CR]*\f[R] or \f[CR]_\f[R] produces \f[B]strong emphasis\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+This is **strong emphasis** and __with underscores__.
+.EE
+.PP
+A \f[CR]*\f[R] or \f[CR]_\f[R] character surrounded by spaces, or
+backslash-escaped, will not trigger emphasis:
+.IP
+.EX
+This is * not emphasized *, and \[rs]*neither is this\[rs]*.
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]intraword_underscores\f[R]
+Because \f[CR]_\f[R] is sometimes used inside words and identifiers,
+pandoc does not interpret a \f[CR]_\f[R] surrounded by alphanumeric
+characters as an emphasis marker.
+If you want to emphasize just part of a word, use \f[CR]*\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+feas*ible*, not feas*able*.
+.EE
+.SS Strikeout
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]strikeout\f[R]
+To strike out a section of text with a horizontal line, begin and end it
+with \f[CR]\[ti]\[ti]\f[R].
+Thus, for example,
+.IP
+.EX
+This \[ti]\[ti]is deleted text.\[ti]\[ti]
+.EE
+.SS Superscripts and subscripts
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]superscript\f[R], \f[CR]subscript\f[R]
+Superscripts may be written by surrounding the superscripted text by
+\f[CR]\[ha]\f[R] characters; subscripts may be written by surrounding
+the subscripted text by \f[CR]\[ti]\f[R] characters.
+Thus, for example,
+.IP
+.EX
+H\[ti]2\[ti]O is a liquid.  2\[ha]10\[ha] is 1024.
+.EE
+.PP
+The text between \f[CR]\[ha]...\[ha]\f[R] or \f[CR]\[ti]...\[ti]\f[R]
+may not contain spaces or newlines.
+If the superscripted or subscripted text contains spaces, these spaces
+must be escaped with backslashes.
+(This is to prevent accidental superscripting and subscripting through
+the ordinary use of \f[CR]\[ti]\f[R] and \f[CR]\[ha]\f[R], and also bad
+interactions with footnotes.)
+Thus, if you want the letter P with `a cat' in subscripts, use
+\f[CR]P\[ti]a\[rs] cat\[ti]\f[R], not \f[CR]P\[ti]a cat\[ti]\f[R].
+.SS Verbatim
+To make a short span of text verbatim, put it inside backticks:
+.IP
+.EX
+What is the difference between \[ga]>>=\[ga] and \[ga]>>\[ga]?
+.EE
+.PP
+If the verbatim text includes a backtick, use double backticks:
+.IP
+.EX
+Here is a literal backtick \[ga]\[ga] \[ga] \[ga]\[ga].
+.EE
+.PP
+(The spaces after the opening backticks and before the closing backticks
+will be ignored.)
+.PP
+The general rule is that a verbatim span starts with a string of
+consecutive backticks (optionally followed by a space) and ends with a
+string of the same number of backticks (optionally preceded by a space).
+.PP
+Note that backslash-escapes (and other Markdown constructs) do not work
+in verbatim contexts:
+.IP
+.EX
+This is a backslash followed by an asterisk: \[ga]\[rs]*\[ga].
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]inline_code_attributes\f[R]
+Attributes can be attached to verbatim text, just as with fenced code
+blocks:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]<$>\[ga]{.haskell}
+.EE
+.SS Underline
+To underline text, use the \f[CR]underline\f[R] class:
+.IP
+.EX
+[Underline]{.underline}
+.EE
+.PP
+Or, without the \f[CR]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension (but with
+\f[CR]native_spans\f[R]):
+.IP
+.EX
+<span class=\[dq]underline\[dq]>Underline</span>
+.EE
+.PP
+This will work in all output formats that support underline.
+.SS Small caps
+To write small caps, use the \f[CR]smallcaps\f[R] class:
+.IP
+.EX
+[Small caps]{.smallcaps}
+.EE
+.PP
+Or, without the \f[CR]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension:
+.IP
+.EX
+<span class=\[dq]smallcaps\[dq]>Small caps</span>
+.EE
+.PP
+For compatibility with other Markdown flavors, CSS is also supported:
+.IP
+.EX
+<span style=\[dq]font-variant:small-caps;\[dq]>Small caps</span>
+.EE
+.PP
+This will work in all output formats that support small caps.
+.SS Highlighting
+To highlight text, use the \f[CR]mark\f[R] class:
+.IP
+.EX
+[Mark]{.mark}
+.EE
+.PP
+Or, without the \f[CR]bracketed_spans\f[R] extension (but with
+\f[CR]native_spans\f[R]):
+.IP
+.EX
+<span class=\[dq]mark\[dq]>Mark</span>
+.EE
+.PP
+This will work in all output formats that support highlighting.
+.SS Math
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]tex_math_dollars\f[R]
+Anything between two \f[CR]$\f[R] characters will be treated as TeX
+math.
+The opening \f[CR]$\f[R] must have a non-space character immediately to
+its right, while the closing \f[CR]$\f[R] must have a non-space
+character immediately to its left, and must not be followed immediately
+by a digit.
+Thus, \f[CR]$20,000 and $30,000\f[R] won\[cq]t parse as math.
+If for some reason you need to enclose text in literal \f[CR]$\f[R]
+characters, backslash-escape them and they won\[cq]t be treated as math
+delimiters.
+.PP
+For display math, use \f[CR]$$\f[R] delimiters.
+(In this case, the delimiters may be separated from the formula by
+whitespace.
+However, there can be no blank lines between the opening and closing
+\f[CR]$$\f[R] delimiters.)
+.PP
+TeX math will be printed in all output formats.
+How it is rendered depends on the output format:
+.TP
+LaTeX
+It will appear verbatim surrounded by \f[CR]\[rs](...\[rs])\f[R] (for
+inline math) or \f[CR]\[rs][...\[rs]]\f[R] (for display math).
+.TP
+Markdown, Emacs Org mode, ConTeXt, ZimWiki
+It will appear verbatim surrounded by \f[CR]$...$\f[R] (for inline math)
+or \f[CR]$$...$$\f[R] (for display math).
+.TP
+XWiki
+It will appear verbatim surrounded by
+\f[CR]{{formula}}..{{/formula}}\f[R].
+.TP
+reStructuredText
+It will be rendered using an interpreted text role \f[CR]:math:\f[R].
+.TP
+AsciiDoc
+For AsciiDoc output math will appear verbatim surrounded by
+\f[CR]latexmath:[...]\f[R].
+For \f[CR]asciidoc_legacy\f[R] the bracketed material will also include
+inline or display math delimiters.
+.TP
+Texinfo
+It will be rendered inside a \f[CR]\[at]math\f[R] command.
+.TP
+roff man, Jira markup
+It will be rendered verbatim without \f[CR]$\f[R]\[cq]s.
+.TP
+MediaWiki, DokuWiki
+It will be rendered inside \f[CR]<math>\f[R] tags.
+.TP
+Textile
+It will be rendered inside \f[CR]<span class=\[dq]math\[dq]>\f[R] tags.
+.TP
+RTF, OpenDocument
+It will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters, and will
+otherwise appear verbatim.
+.TP
+ODT
+It will be rendered, if possible, using MathML.
+.TP
+DocBook
+If the \f[CR]--mathml\f[R] flag is used, it will be rendered using
+MathML in an \f[CR]inlineequation\f[R] or \f[CR]informalequation\f[R]
+tag.
+Otherwise it will be rendered, if possible, using Unicode characters.
+.TP
+Docx and PowerPoint
+It will be rendered using OMML math markup.
+.TP
+FictionBook2
+If the \f[CR]--webtex\f[R] option is used, formulas are rendered as
+images using CodeCogs or other compatible web service, downloaded and
+embedded in the e-book.
+Otherwise, they will appear verbatim.
+.TP
+HTML, Slidy, DZSlides, S5, EPUB
+The way math is rendered in HTML will depend on the command-line options
+selected.
+Therefore see Math rendering in HTML above.
+.SS Raw HTML
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]raw_html\f[R]
+Markdown allows you to insert raw HTML (or DocBook) anywhere in a
+document (except verbatim contexts, where \f[CR]<\f[R], \f[CR]>\f[R],
+and \f[CR]&\f[R] are interpreted literally).
+(Technically this is not an extension, since standard Markdown allows
+it, but it has been made an extension so that it can be disabled if
+desired.)
+.PP
+The raw HTML is passed through unchanged in HTML, S5, Slidy, Slideous,
+DZSlides, EPUB, Markdown, CommonMark, Emacs Org mode, and Textile
+output, and suppressed in other formats.
+.PP
+For a more explicit way of including raw HTML in a Markdown document,
+see the \f[CR]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
+.PP
+In the CommonMark format, if \f[CR]raw_html\f[R] is enabled,
+superscripts, subscripts, strikeouts and small capitals will be
+represented as HTML.
+Otherwise, plain-text fallbacks will be used.
+Note that even if \f[CR]raw_html\f[R] is disabled, tables will be
+rendered with HTML syntax if they cannot use pipe syntax.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R]
+Original Markdown allows you to include HTML \[lq]blocks\[rq]: blocks of
+HTML between balanced tags that are separated from the surrounding text
+with blank lines, and start and end at the left margin.
+Within these blocks, everything is interpreted as HTML, not Markdown; so
+(for example), \f[CR]*\f[R] does not signify emphasis.
+.PP
+Pandoc behaves this way when the \f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] format is
+used; but by default, pandoc interprets material between HTML block tags
+as Markdown.
+Thus, for example, pandoc will turn
+.IP
+.EX
+<table>
+<tr>
+<td>*one*</td>
+<td>[a link](https://google.com)</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+.EE
+.PP
+into
+.IP
+.EX
+<table>
+<tr>
+<td><em>one</em></td>
+<td><a href=\[dq]https://google.com\[dq]>a link</a></td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+.EE
+.PP
+whereas \f[CR]Markdown.pl\f[R] will preserve it as is.
+.PP
+There is one exception to this rule: text between \f[CR]<script>\f[R],
+\f[CR]<style>\f[R], and \f[CR]<textarea>\f[R] tags is not interpreted as
+Markdown.
+.PP
+This departure from original Markdown should make it easier to mix
+Markdown with HTML block elements.
+For example, one can surround a block of Markdown text with
+\f[CR]<div>\f[R] tags without preventing it from being interpreted as
+Markdown.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]native_divs\f[R]
+Use native pandoc \f[CR]Div\f[R] blocks for content inside
+\f[CR]<div>\f[R] tags.
+For the most part this should give the same output as
+\f[CR]markdown_in_html_blocks\f[R], but it makes it easier to write
+pandoc filters to manipulate groups of blocks.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]native_spans\f[R]
+Use native pandoc \f[CR]Span\f[R] blocks for content inside
+\f[CR]<span>\f[R] tags.
+For the most part this should give the same output as
+\f[CR]raw_html\f[R], but it makes it easier to write pandoc filters to
+manipulate groups of inlines.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]raw_tex\f[R]
+In addition to raw HTML, pandoc allows raw LaTeX, TeX, and ConTeXt to be
+included in a document.
+Inline TeX commands will be preserved and passed unchanged to the LaTeX
+and ConTeXt writers.
+Thus, for example, you can use LaTeX to include BibTeX citations:
+.IP
+.EX
+This result was proved in \[rs]cite{jones.1967}.
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that in LaTeX environments, like
+.IP
+.EX
+\[rs]begin{tabular}{|l|l|}\[rs]hline
+Age & Frequency \[rs]\[rs] \[rs]hline
+18--25  & 15 \[rs]\[rs]
+26--35  & 33 \[rs]\[rs]
+36--45  & 22 \[rs]\[rs] \[rs]hline
+\[rs]end{tabular}
+.EE
+.PP
+the material between the begin and end tags will be interpreted as raw
+LaTeX, not as Markdown.
+.PP
+For a more explicit and flexible way of including raw TeX in a Markdown
+document, see the \f[CR]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
+.PP
+Inline LaTeX is ignored in output formats other than Markdown, LaTeX,
+Emacs Org mode, and ConTeXt.
+.SS Generic raw attribute
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]raw_attribute\f[R]
+Inline spans and fenced code blocks with a special kind of attribute
+will be parsed as raw content with the designated format.
+For example, the following produces a raw roff \f[CR]ms\f[R] block:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]{=ms}
+\&.MYMACRO
+blah blah
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+And the following produces a raw \f[CR]html\f[R] inline element:
+.IP
+.EX
+This is \[ga]<a>html</a>\[ga]{=html}
+.EE
+.PP
+This can be useful to insert raw xml into \f[CR]docx\f[R] documents,
+e.g.
+a pagebreak:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]{=openxml}
+<w:p>
+  <w:r>
+    <w:br w:type=\[dq]page\[dq]/>
+  </w:r>
+</w:p>
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.PP
+The format name should match the target format name (see
+\f[CR]-t/--to\f[R], above, for a list, or use
+\f[CR]pandoc --list-output-formats\f[R]).
+Use \f[CR]openxml\f[R] for \f[CR]docx\f[R] output,
+\f[CR]opendocument\f[R] for \f[CR]odt\f[R] output, \f[CR]html5\f[R] for
+\f[CR]epub3\f[R] output, \f[CR]html4\f[R] for \f[CR]epub2\f[R] output,
+and \f[CR]latex\f[R], \f[CR]beamer\f[R], \f[CR]ms\f[R], or
+\f[CR]html5\f[R] for \f[CR]pdf\f[R] output (depending on what you use
+for \f[CR]--pdf-engine\f[R]).
+.PP
+This extension presupposes that the relevant kind of inline code or
+fenced code block is enabled.
+Thus, for example, to use a raw attribute with a backtick code block,
+\f[CR]backtick_code_blocks\f[R] must be enabled.
+.PP
+The raw attribute cannot be combined with regular attributes.
+.SS LaTeX macros
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]latex_macros\f[R]
+When this extension is enabled, pandoc will parse LaTeX macro
+definitions and apply the resulting macros to all LaTeX math and raw
+LaTeX.
+So, for example, the following will work in all output formats, not just
+LaTeX:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[rs]newcommand{\[rs]tuple}[1]{\[rs]langle #1 \[rs]rangle}
+
+$\[rs]tuple{a, b, c}$
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that LaTeX macros will not be applied if they occur inside a raw
+span or block marked with the \f[CR]raw_attribute\f[R] extension.
+.PP
+When \f[CR]latex_macros\f[R] is disabled, the raw LaTeX and math will
+not have macros applied.
+This is usually a better approach when you are targeting LaTeX or PDF.
+.PP
+Macro definitions in LaTeX will be passed through as raw LaTeX only if
+\f[CR]latex_macros\f[R] is not enabled.
+Macro definitions in Markdown source (or other formats allowing
+\f[CR]raw_tex\f[R]) will be passed through regardless of whether
+\f[CR]latex_macros\f[R] is enabled.
+.SS Links
+Markdown allows links to be specified in several ways.
+.SS Automatic links
+If you enclose a URL or email address in pointy brackets, it will become
+a link:
+.IP
+.EX
+<https://google.com>
+<sam\[at]green.eggs.ham>
+.EE
+.SS Inline links
+An inline link consists of the link text in square brackets, followed by
+the URL in parentheses.
+(Optionally, the URL can be followed by a link title, in quotes.)
+.IP
+.EX
+This is an [inline link](/url), and here\[aq]s [one with
+a title](https://fsf.org \[dq]click here for a good time!\[dq]).
+.EE
+.PP
+There can be no space between the bracketed part and the parenthesized
+part.
+The link text can contain formatting (such as emphasis), but the title
+cannot.
+.PP
+Email addresses in inline links are not autodetected, so they have to be
+prefixed with \f[CR]mailto\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+[Write me!](mailto:sam\[at]green.eggs.ham)
+.EE
+.SS Reference links
+An \f[I]explicit\f[R] reference link has two parts, the link itself and
+the link definition, which may occur elsewhere in the document (either
+before or after the link).
+.PP
+The link consists of link text in square brackets, followed by a label
+in square brackets.
+(There cannot be space between the two unless the
+\f[CR]spaced_reference_links\f[R] extension is enabled.)
+The link definition consists of the bracketed label, followed by a colon
+and a space, followed by the URL, and optionally (after a space) a link
+title either in quotes or in parentheses.
+The label must not be parseable as a citation (assuming the
+\f[CR]citations\f[R] extension is enabled): citations take precedence
+over link labels.
+.PP
+Here are some examples:
+.IP
+.EX
+[my label 1]: /foo/bar.html  \[dq]My title, optional\[dq]
+[my label 2]: /foo
+[my label 3]: https://fsf.org (The Free Software Foundation)
+[my label 4]: /bar#special  \[aq]A title in single quotes\[aq]
+.EE
+.PP
+The URL may optionally be surrounded by angle brackets:
+.IP
+.EX
+[my label 5]: <http://foo.bar.baz>
+.EE
+.PP
+The title may go on the next line:
+.IP
+.EX
+[my label 3]: https://fsf.org
+  \[dq]The Free Software Foundation\[dq]
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that link labels are not case sensitive.
+So, this will work:
+.IP
+.EX
+Here is [my link][FOO]
+
+[Foo]: /bar/baz
+.EE
+.PP
+In an \f[I]implicit\f[R] reference link, the second pair of brackets is
+empty:
+.IP
+.EX
+See [my website][].
+
+[my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
+.EE
+.PP
+Note: In \f[CR]Markdown.pl\f[R] and most other Markdown implementations,
+reference link definitions cannot occur in nested constructions such as
+list items or block quotes.
+Pandoc lifts this arbitrary-seeming restriction.
+So the following is fine in pandoc, though not in most other
+implementations:
+.IP
+.EX
+> My block [quote].
+>
+> [quote]: /foo
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]shortcut_reference_links\f[R]
+In a \f[I]shortcut\f[R] reference link, the second pair of brackets may
+be omitted entirely:
+.IP
+.EX
+See [my website].
+
+[my website]: http://foo.bar.baz
+.EE
+.SS Internal links
+To link to another section of the same document, use the automatically
+generated identifier (see Heading identifiers).
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+See the [Introduction](#introduction).
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+See the [Introduction].
+
+[Introduction]: #introduction
+.EE
+.PP
+Internal links are currently supported for HTML formats (including HTML
+slide shows and EPUB), LaTeX, and ConTeXt.
+.SS Images
+A link immediately preceded by a \f[CR]!\f[R] will be treated as an
+image.
+The link text will be used as the image\[cq]s alt text:
+.IP
+.EX
+![la lune](lalune.jpg \[dq]Voyage to the moon\[dq])
+
+![movie reel]
+
+[movie reel]: movie.gif
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]implicit_figures\f[R]
+An image with nonempty alt text, occurring by itself in a paragraph,
+will be rendered as a figure with a caption.
+The image\[cq]s alt text will be used as the caption.
+.IP
+.EX
+![This is the caption](/url/of/image.png)
+.EE
+.PP
+How this is rendered depends on the output format.
+Some output formats (e.g.\ RTF) do not yet support figures.
+In those formats, you\[cq]ll just get an image in a paragraph by itself,
+with no caption.
+.PP
+If you just want a regular inline image, just make sure it is not the
+only thing in the paragraph.
+One way to do this is to insert a nonbreaking space after the image:
+.IP
+.EX
+![This image won\[aq]t be a figure](/url/of/image.png)\[rs]
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that in reveal.js slide shows, an image in a paragraph by itself
+that has the \f[CR]r-stretch\f[R] class will fill the screen, and the
+caption and figure tags will be omitted.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]link_attributes\f[R]
+Attributes can be set on links and images:
+.IP
+.EX
+An inline ![image](foo.jpg){#id .class width=30 height=20px}
+and a reference ![image][ref] with attributes.
+
+[ref]: foo.jpg \[dq]optional title\[dq] {#id .class key=val key2=\[dq]val 2\[dq]}
+.EE
+.PP
+(This syntax is compatible with PHP Markdown Extra when only
+\f[CR]#id\f[R] and \f[CR].class\f[R] are used.)
+.PP
+For HTML and EPUB, all known HTML5 attributes except \f[CR]width\f[R]
+and \f[CR]height\f[R] (but including \f[CR]srcset\f[R] and
+\f[CR]sizes\f[R]) are passed through as is.
+Unknown attributes are passed through as custom attributes, with
+\f[CR]data-\f[R] prepended.
+The other writers ignore attributes that are not specifically supported
+by their output format.
+.PP
+The \f[CR]width\f[R] and \f[CR]height\f[R] attributes on images are
+treated specially.
+When used without a unit, the unit is assumed to be pixels.
+However, any of the following unit identifiers can be used:
+\f[CR]px\f[R], \f[CR]cm\f[R], \f[CR]mm\f[R], \f[CR]in\f[R],
+\f[CR]inch\f[R] and \f[CR]%\f[R].
+There must not be any spaces between the number and the unit.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+![](file.jpg){ width=50% }
+.EE
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Dimensions may be converted to a form that is compatible with the output
+format (for example, dimensions given in pixels will be converted to
+inches when converting HTML to LaTeX).
+Conversion between pixels and physical measurements is affected by the
+\f[CR]--dpi\f[R] option (by default, 96 dpi is assumed, unless the image
+itself contains dpi information).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+The \f[CR]%\f[R] unit is generally relative to some available space.
+For example the above example will render to the following.
+.RS 2
+.IP \[bu] 2
+HTML:
+\f[CR]<img href=\[dq]file.jpg\[dq] style=\[dq]width: 50%;\[dq] />\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+LaTeX:
+\f[CR]\[rs]includegraphics[width=0.5\[rs]textwidth,height=\[rs]textheight]{file.jpg}\f[R]
+(If you\[cq]re using a custom template, you need to configure
+\f[CR]graphicx\f[R] as in the default template.)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+ConTeXt:
+\f[CR]\[rs]externalfigure[file.jpg][width=0.5\[rs]textwidth]\f[R]
+.RE
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Some output formats have a notion of a class (ConTeXt) or a unique
+identifier (LaTeX \f[CR]\[rs]caption\f[R]), or both (HTML).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+When no \f[CR]width\f[R] or \f[CR]height\f[R] attributes are specified,
+the fallback is to look at the image resolution and the dpi metadata
+embedded in the image file.
+.SS Divs and Spans
+Using the \f[CR]native_divs\f[R] and \f[CR]native_spans\f[R] extensions
+(see above), HTML syntax can be used as part of markdown to create
+native \f[CR]Div\f[R] and \f[CR]Span\f[R] elements in the pandoc AST (as
+opposed to raw HTML).
+However, there is also nicer syntax available:
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]fenced_divs\f[R]
+Allow special fenced syntax for native \f[CR]Div\f[R] blocks.
+A Div starts with a fence containing at least three consecutive colons
+plus some attributes.
+The attributes may optionally be followed by another string of
+consecutive colons.
+.PP
+Note: the \f[CR]commonmark\f[R] parser doesn\[cq]t permit colons after
+the attributes.
+.PP
+The attribute syntax is exactly as in fenced code blocks (see Extension:
+\f[CR]fenced_code_attributes\f[R]).
+As with fenced code blocks, one can use either attributes in curly
+braces or a single unbraced word, which will be treated as a class name.
+The Div ends with another line containing a string of at least three
+consecutive colons.
+The fenced Div should be separated by blank lines from preceding and
+following blocks.
+.PP
+Example:
+.IP
+.EX
+::::: {#special .sidebar}
+Here is a paragraph.
+
+And another.
+:::::
+.EE
+.PP
+Fenced divs can be nested.
+Opening fences are distinguished because they \f[I]must\f[R] have
+attributes:
+.IP
+.EX
+::: Warning ::::::
+This is a warning.
+
+::: Danger
+This is a warning within a warning.
+:::
+::::::::::::::::::
+.EE
+.PP
+Fences without attributes are always closing fences.
+Unlike with fenced code blocks, the number of colons in the closing
+fence need not match the number in the opening fence.
+However, it can be helpful for visual clarity to use fences of different
+lengths to distinguish nested divs from their parents.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]bracketed_spans\f[R]
+A bracketed sequence of inlines, as one would use to begin a link, will
+be treated as a \f[CR]Span\f[R] with attributes if it is followed
+immediately by attributes:
+.IP
+.EX
+[This is *some text*]{.class key=\[dq]val\[dq]}
+.EE
+.SS Footnotes
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]footnotes\f[R]
+Pandoc\[cq]s Markdown allows footnotes, using the following syntax:
+.IP
+.EX
+Here is a footnote reference,[\[ha]1] and another.[\[ha]longnote]
+
+[\[ha]1]: Here is the footnote.
+
+[\[ha]longnote]: Here\[aq]s one with multiple blocks.
+
+    Subsequent paragraphs are indented to show that they
+belong to the previous footnote.
+
+        { some.code }
+
+    The whole paragraph can be indented, or just the first
+    line.  In this way, multi-paragraph footnotes work like
+    multi-paragraph list items.
+
+This paragraph won\[aq]t be part of the note, because it
+isn\[aq]t indented.
+.EE
+.PP
+The identifiers in footnote references may not contain spaces, tabs,
+newlines, or the characters \f[CR]\[ha]\f[R], \f[CR][\f[R], or
+\f[CR]]\f[R].
+These identifiers are used only to correlate the footnote reference with
+the note itself; in the output, footnotes will be numbered sequentially.
+.PP
+The footnotes themselves need not be placed at the end of the document.
+They may appear anywhere except inside other block elements (lists,
+block quotes, tables, etc.).
+Each footnote should be separated from surrounding content (including
+other footnotes) by blank lines.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]inline_notes\f[R]
+Inline footnotes are also allowed (though, unlike regular notes, they
+cannot contain multiple paragraphs).
+The syntax is as follows:
+.IP
+.EX
+Here is an inline note.\[ha][Inline notes are easier to write, since
+you don\[aq]t have to pick an identifier and move down to type the
+note.]
+.EE
+.PP
+Inline and regular footnotes may be mixed freely.
+.SS Citation syntax
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]citations\f[R]
+To cite a bibliographic item with an identifier foo, use the syntax
+\f[CR]\[at]foo\f[R].
+Normal citations should be included in square brackets, with semicolons
+separating distinct items:
+.IP
+.EX
+Blah blah [\[at]doe99; \[at]smith2000; \[at]smith2004].
+.EE
+.PP
+How this is rendered depends on the citation style.
+In an author-date style, it might render as
+.IP
+.EX
+Blah blah (Doe 1999, Smith 2000, 2004).
+.EE
+.PP
+In a footnote style, it might render as
+.IP
+.EX
+Blah blah.[\[ha]1]
+
+[\[ha]1]:  John Doe, \[dq]Frogs,\[dq] *Journal of Amphibians* 44 (1999);
+Susan Smith, \[dq]Flies,\[dq] *Journal of Insects* (2000);
+Susan Smith, \[dq]Bees,\[dq] *Journal of Insects* (2004).
+.EE
+.PP
+See the CSL user documentation for more information about CSL styles and
+how they affect rendering.
+.PP
+Unless a citation key starts with a letter, digit, or \f[CR]_\f[R], and
+contains only alphanumerics and single internal punctuation characters
+(\f[CR]:.#$%&-+?<>\[ti]/\f[R]), it must be surrounded by curly braces,
+which are not considered part of the key.
+In \f[CR]\[at]Foo_bar.baz.\f[R], the key is \f[CR]Foo_bar.baz\f[R]
+because the final period is not \f[I]internal\f[R] punctuation, so it is
+not included in the key.
+In \f[CR]\[at]{Foo_bar.baz.}\f[R], the key is \f[CR]Foo_bar.baz.\f[R],
+including the final period.
+In \f[CR]\[at]Foo_bar--baz\f[R], the key is \f[CR]Foo_bar\f[R] because
+the repeated internal punctuation characters terminate the key.
+The curly braces are recommended if you use URLs as keys:
+\f[CR][\[at]{https://example.com/bib?name=foobar&date=2000}, p.  33]\f[R].
+.PP
+Citation items may optionally include a prefix, a locator, and a suffix.
+In
+.IP
+.EX
+Blah blah [see \[at]doe99, pp. 33-35 and *passim*; \[at]smith04, chap. 1].
+.EE
+.PP
+the first item (\f[CR]doe99\f[R]) has prefix \f[CR]see\f[R], locator
+\f[CR]pp.  33-35\f[R], and suffix \f[CR]and *passim*\f[R].
+The second item (\f[CR]smith04\f[R]) has locator \f[CR]chap. 1\f[R] and
+no prefix or suffix.
+.PP
+Pandoc uses some heuristics to separate the locator from the rest of the
+subject.
+It is sensitive to the locator terms defined in the CSL locale files.
+Either abbreviated or unabbreviated forms are accepted.
+In the \f[CR]en-US\f[R] locale, locator terms can be written in either
+singular or plural forms, as \f[CR]book\f[R],
+\f[CR]bk.\f[R]/\f[CR]bks.\f[R]; \f[CR]chapter\f[R],
+\f[CR]chap.\f[R]/\f[CR]chaps.\f[R]; \f[CR]column\f[R],
+\f[CR]col.\f[R]/\f[CR]cols.\f[R]; \f[CR]figure\f[R],
+\f[CR]fig.\f[R]/\f[CR]figs.\f[R]; \f[CR]folio\f[R],
+\f[CR]fol.\f[R]/\f[CR]fols.\f[R]; \f[CR]number\f[R],
+\f[CR]no.\f[R]/\f[CR]nos.\f[R]; \f[CR]line\f[R],
+\f[CR]l.\f[R]/\f[CR]ll.\f[R]; \f[CR]note\f[R],
+\f[CR]n.\f[R]/\f[CR]nn.\f[R]; \f[CR]opus\f[R],
+\f[CR]op.\f[R]/\f[CR]opp.\f[R]; \f[CR]page\f[R],
+\f[CR]p.\f[R]/\f[CR]pp.\f[R]; \f[CR]paragraph\f[R],
+\f[CR]para.\f[R]/\f[CR]paras.\f[R]; \f[CR]part\f[R],
+\f[CR]pt.\f[R]/\f[CR]pts.\f[R]; \f[CR]section\f[R],
+\f[CR]sec.\f[R]/\f[CR]secs.\f[R]; \f[CR]sub verbo\f[R],
+\f[CR]s.v.\f[R]/\f[CR]s.vv.\f[R]; \f[CR]verse\f[R],
+\f[CR]v.\f[R]/\f[CR]vv.\f[R]; \f[CR]volume\f[R],
+\f[CR]vol.\f[R]/\f[CR]vols.\f[R]; \f[CR]¶\f[R]/\f[CR]¶¶\f[R];
+\f[CR]§\f[R]/\f[CR]§§\f[R].
+If no locator term is used, \[lq]page\[rq] is assumed.
+.PP
+In complex cases, you can force something to be treated as a locator by
+enclosing it in curly braces or prevent parsing the suffix as locator by
+prepending curly braces:
+.IP
+.EX
+[\[at]smith{ii, A, D-Z}, with a suffix]
+[\[at]smith, {pp. iv, vi-xi, (xv)-(xvii)} with suffix here]
+[\[at]smith{}, 99 years later]
+.EE
+.PP
+A minus sign (\f[CR]-\f[R]) before the \f[CR]\[at]\f[R] will suppress
+mention of the author in the citation.
+This can be useful when the author is already mentioned in the text:
+.IP
+.EX
+Smith says blah [-\[at]smith04].
+.EE
+.PP
+You can also write an author-in-text citation, by omitting the square
+brackets:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[at]smith04 says blah.
+
+\[at]smith04 [p. 33] says blah.
+.EE
+.PP
+This will cause the author\[cq]s name to be rendered, followed by the
+bibliographical details.
+Use this form when you want to make the citation the subject of a
+sentence.
+.PP
+When you are using a note style, it is usually better to let citeproc
+create the footnotes from citations rather than writing an explicit
+note.
+If you do write an explicit note that contains a citation, note that
+normal citations will be put in parentheses, while author-in-text
+citations will not.
+For this reason, it is sometimes preferable to use the author-in-text
+style inside notes when using a note style.
+.SS Non-default extensions
+The following Markdown syntax extensions are not enabled by default in
+pandoc, but may be enabled by adding \f[CR]+EXTENSION\f[R] to the format
+name, where \f[CR]EXTENSION\f[R] is the name of the extension.
+Thus, for example, \f[CR]markdown+hard_line_breaks\f[R] is Markdown with
+hard line breaks.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]rebase_relative_paths\f[R]
+Rewrite relative paths for Markdown links and images, depending on the
+path of the file containing the link or image link.
+For each link or image, pandoc will compute the directory of the
+containing file, relative to the working directory, and prepend the
+resulting path to the link or image path.
+.PP
+The use of this extension is best understood by example.
+Suppose you have a subdirectory for each chapter of a book,
+\f[CR]chap1\f[R], \f[CR]chap2\f[R], \f[CR]chap3\f[R].
+Each contains a file \f[CR]text.md\f[R] and a number of images used in
+the chapter.
+You would like to have \f[CR]![image](spider.jpg)\f[R] in
+\f[CR]chap1/text.md\f[R] refer to \f[CR]chap1/spider.jpg\f[R] and
+\f[CR]![image](spider.jpg)\f[R] in \f[CR]chap2/text.md\f[R] refer to
+\f[CR]chap2/spider.jpg\f[R].
+To do this, use
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc chap*/*.md -f markdown+rebase_relative_paths
+.EE
+.PP
+Without this extension, you would have to use
+\f[CR]![image](chap1/spider.jpg)\f[R] in \f[CR]chap1/text.md\f[R] and
+\f[CR]![image](chap2/spider.jpg)\f[R] in \f[CR]chap2/text.md\f[R].
+Links with relative paths will be rewritten in the same way as images.
+.PP
+Absolute paths and URLs are not changed.
+Neither are empty paths or paths consisting entirely of a fragment,
+e.g., \f[CR]#foo\f[R].
+.PP
+Note that relative paths in reference links and images will be rewritten
+relative to the file containing the link reference definition, not the
+file containing the reference link or image itself, if these differ.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]mark\f[R]
+To highlight out a section of text, begin and end it with with
+\f[CR]==\f[R].
+Thus, for example,
+.IP
+.EX
+This ==is deleted text.==
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]attributes\f[R]
+Allows attributes to be attached to any inline or block-level element
+when parsing \f[CR]commonmark\f[R].
+The syntax for the attributes is the same as that used in
+\f[CR]header_attributes\f[R].
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Attributes that occur immediately after an inline element affect that
+element.
+If they follow a space, then they belong to the space.
+(Hence, this option subsumes \f[CR]inline_code_attributes\f[R] and
+\f[CR]link_attributes\f[R].)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Attributes that occur immediately before a block element, on a line by
+themselves, affect that element.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Consecutive attribute specifiers may be used, either for blocks or for
+inlines.
+Their attributes will be combined.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Attributes that occur at the end of the text of a Setext or ATX heading
+(separated by whitespace from the text) affect the heading element.
+(Hence, this option subsumes \f[CR]header_attributes\f[R].)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Attributes that occur after the opening fence in a fenced code block
+affect the code block element.
+(Hence, this option subsumes \f[CR]fenced_code_attributes\f[R].)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Attributes that occur at the end of a reference link definition affect
+links that refer to that definition.
+.PP
+Note that pandoc\[cq]s AST does not currently allow attributes to be
+attached to arbitrary elements.
+Hence a Span or Div container will be added if needed.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]old_dashes\f[R]
+Selects the pandoc <= 1.8.2.1 behavior for parsing smart dashes:
+\f[CR]-\f[R] before a numeral is an en-dash, and \f[CR]--\f[R] is an
+em-dash.
+This option only has an effect if \f[CR]smart\f[R] is enabled.
+It is selected automatically for \f[CR]textile\f[R] input.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]angle_brackets_escapable\f[R]
+Allow \f[CR]<\f[R] and \f[CR]>\f[R] to be backslash-escaped, as they can
+be in GitHub flavored Markdown but not original Markdown.
+This is implied by pandoc\[cq]s default
+\f[CR]all_symbols_escapable\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]lists_without_preceding_blankline\f[R]
+Allow a list to occur right after a paragraph, with no intervening blank
+space.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]four_space_rule\f[R]
+Selects the pandoc <= 2.0 behavior for parsing lists, so that four
+spaces indent are needed for list item continuation paragraphs.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]spaced_reference_links\f[R]
+Allow whitespace between the two components of a reference link, for
+example,
+.IP
+.EX
+[foo] [bar].
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]hard_line_breaks\f[R]
+Causes all newlines within a paragraph to be interpreted as hard line
+breaks instead of spaces.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]ignore_line_breaks\f[R]
+Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
+treated as spaces or as hard line breaks.
+This option is intended for use with East Asian languages where spaces
+are not used between words, but text is divided into lines for
+readability.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]east_asian_line_breaks\f[R]
+Causes newlines within a paragraph to be ignored, rather than being
+treated as spaces or as hard line breaks, when they occur between two
+East Asian wide characters.
+This is a better choice than \f[CR]ignore_line_breaks\f[R] for texts
+that include a mix of East Asian wide characters and other characters.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]emoji\f[R]
+Parses textual emojis like \f[CR]:smile:\f[R] as Unicode emoticons.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]tex_math_gfm\f[R]
+Supports two GitHub-specific formats for math.
+Inline math: \f[CR]$\[ga]e=mc\[ha]2\[ga]$\f[R].
+.PP
+Display math:
+.IP
+.EX
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] math
+e=mc\[ha]2
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]tex_math_single_backslash\f[R]
+Causes anything between \f[CR]\[rs](\f[R] and \f[CR]\[rs])\f[R] to be
+interpreted as inline TeX math, and anything between \f[CR]\[rs][\f[R]
+and \f[CR]\[rs]]\f[R] to be interpreted as display TeX math.
+Note: a drawback of this extension is that it precludes escaping
+\f[CR](\f[R] and \f[CR][\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]tex_math_double_backslash\f[R]
+Causes anything between \f[CR]\[rs]\[rs](\f[R] and
+\f[CR]\[rs]\[rs])\f[R] to be interpreted as inline TeX math, and
+anything between \f[CR]\[rs]\[rs][\f[R] and \f[CR]\[rs]\[rs]]\f[R] to be
+interpreted as display TeX math.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]markdown_attribute\f[R]
+By default, pandoc interprets material inside block-level tags as
+Markdown.
+This extension changes the behavior so that Markdown is only parsed
+inside block-level tags if the tags have the attribute
+\f[CR]markdown=1\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]mmd_title_block\f[R]
+Enables a MultiMarkdown style title block at the top of the document,
+for example:
+.IP
+.EX
+Title:   My title
+Author:  John Doe
+Date:    September 1, 2008
+Comment: This is a sample mmd title block, with
+         a field spanning multiple lines.
+.EE
+.PP
+See the MultiMarkdown documentation for details.
+If \f[CR]pandoc_title_block\f[R] or \f[CR]yaml_metadata_block\f[R] is
+enabled, it will take precedence over \f[CR]mmd_title_block\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]abbreviations\f[R]
+Parses PHP Markdown Extra abbreviation keys, like
+.IP
+.EX
+*[HTML]: Hypertext Markup Language
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that the pandoc document model does not support abbreviations, so
+if this extension is enabled, abbreviation keys are simply skipped (as
+opposed to being parsed as paragraphs).
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]alerts\f[R]
+Supports GitHub-style markdown alerts, like
+.IP
+.EX
+> [!INFO]
+> This is an informational message.
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]autolink_bare_uris\f[R]
+Makes all absolute URIs into links, even when not surrounded by pointy
+braces \f[CR]<...>\f[R].
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]mmd_link_attributes\f[R]
+Parses multimarkdown style key-value attributes on link and image
+references.
+This extension should not be confused with the
+\f[CR]link_attributes\f[R] extension.
+.IP
+.EX
+This is a reference ![image][ref] with multimarkdown attributes.
+
+[ref]: https://path.to/image \[dq]Image title\[dq] width=20px height=30px
+       id=myId class=\[dq]myClass1 myClass2\[dq]
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]mmd_header_identifiers\f[R]
+Parses multimarkdown style heading identifiers (in square brackets,
+after the heading but before any trailing \f[CR]#\f[R]s in an ATX
+heading).
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]compact_definition_lists\f[R]
+Activates the definition list syntax of pandoc 1.12.x and earlier.
+This syntax differs from the one described above under Definition lists
+in several respects:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+No blank line is required between consecutive items of the definition
+list.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+To get a \[lq]tight\[rq] or \[lq]compact\[rq] list, omit space between
+consecutive items; the space between a term and its definition does not
+affect anything.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Lazy wrapping of paragraphs is not allowed: the entire definition must
+be indented four spaces.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]gutenberg\f[R]
+Use Project Gutenberg conventions for \f[CR]plain\f[R] output: all-caps
+for strong emphasis, surround by underscores for regular emphasis, add
+extra blank space around headings.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]sourcepos\f[R]
+Include source position attributes when parsing \f[CR]commonmark\f[R].
+For elements that accept attributes, a \f[CR]data-pos\f[R] attribute is
+added; other elements are placed in a surrounding Div or Span element
+with a \f[CR]data-pos\f[R] attribute.
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]short_subsuperscripts\f[R]
+Parse multimarkdown style subscripts and superscripts, which start with
+a `\[ti]' or `\[ha]' character, respectively, and include the
+alphanumeric sequence that follows.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+x\[ha]2 = 4
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+Oxygen is O\[ti]2.
+.EE
+.SS Extension: \f[CR]wikilinks_title_after_pipe\f[R]
+Pandoc supports multiple markdown wikilink syntaxes, regardless of
+whether the title is before or after the pipe.
+.PP
+Using \f[CR]--from=markdown+wikilinks_title_after_pipe\f[R] results in
+.IP
+.EX
+[[URL|title]]
+.EE
+.PP
+while using \f[CR]--from=markdown+wikilinks_title_before_pipe\f[R]
+results in
+.IP
+.EX
+[[title|URL]]
+.EE
+.SS Markdown variants
+In addition to pandoc\[cq]s extended Markdown, the following Markdown
+variants are supported:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_phpextra\f[R] (PHP Markdown Extra)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_github\f[R] (deprecated GitHub-Flavored Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_mmd\f[R] (MultiMarkdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]markdown_strict\f[R] (Markdown.pl)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]commonmark\f[R] (CommonMark)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]gfm\f[R] (Github-Flavored Markdown)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]commonmark_x\f[R] (CommonMark with many pandoc extensions)
+.PP
+To see which extensions are supported for a given format, and which are
+enabled by default, you can use the command
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --list-extensions=FORMAT
+.EE
+.PP
+where \f[CR]FORMAT\f[R] is replaced with the name of the format.
+.PP
+Note that the list of extensions for \f[CR]commonmark\f[R],
+\f[CR]gfm\f[R], and \f[CR]commonmark_x\f[R] are defined relative to
+default commonmark.
+So, for example, \f[CR]backtick_code_blocks\f[R] does not appear as an
+extension, since it is enabled by default and cannot be disabled.
+.SH CITATIONS
+When the \f[CR]--citeproc\f[R] option is used, pandoc can automatically
+generate citations and a bibliography in a number of styles.
+Basic usage is
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --citeproc myinput.txt
+.EE
+.PP
+To use this feature, you will need to have
+.IP \[bu] 2
+a document containing citations (see Citation syntax);
+.IP \[bu] 2
+a source of bibliographic data: either an external bibliography file or
+a list of \f[CR]references\f[R] in the document\[cq]s YAML metadata;
+.IP \[bu] 2
+optionally, a CSL citation style.
+.SS Specifying bibliographic data
+You can specify an external bibliography using the
+\f[CR]bibliography\f[R] metadata field in a YAML metadata section or the
+\f[CR]--bibliography\f[R] command line argument.
+If you want to use multiple bibliography files, you can supply multiple
+\f[CR]--bibliography\f[R] arguments or set \f[CR]bibliography\f[R]
+metadata field to YAML array.
+A bibliography may have any of these formats:
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+  Format     File extension
+  ---------- ----------------
+  BibLaTeX   .bib
+  BibTeX     .bibtex
+  CSL JSON   .json
+  CSL YAML   .yaml
+  RIS        .ris
+.EE
+.RE
+.PP
+Note that \f[CR].bib\f[R] can be used with both BibTeX and BibLaTeX
+files; use the extension \f[CR].bibtex\f[R] to force interpretation as
+BibTeX.
+.PP
+In BibTeX and BibLaTeX databases, pandoc parses LaTeX markup inside
+fields such as \f[CR]title\f[R]; in CSL YAML databases, pandoc Markdown;
+and in CSL JSON databases, an HTML-like markup:
+.TP
+\f[CR]<i>...</i>\f[R]
+italics
+.TP
+\f[CR]<b>...</b>\f[R]
+bold
+.TP
+\f[CR]<span style=\[dq]font-variant:small-caps;\[dq]>...</span>\f[R] or \f[CR]<sc>...</sc>\f[R]
+small capitals
+.TP
+\f[CR]<sub>...</sub>\f[R]
+subscript
+.TP
+\f[CR]<sup>...</sup>\f[R]
+superscript
+.TP
+\f[CR]<span class=\[dq]nocase\[dq]>...</span>\f[R]
+prevent a phrase from being capitalized as title case
+.PP
+As an alternative to specifying a bibliography file using
+\f[CR]--bibliography\f[R] or the YAML metadata field
+\f[CR]bibliography\f[R], you can include the citation data directly in
+the \f[CR]references\f[R] field of the document\[cq]s YAML metadata.
+The field should contain an array of YAML-encoded references, for
+example:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+references:
+- type: article-journal
+  id: WatsonCrick1953
+  author:
+  - family: Watson
+    given: J. D.
+  - family: Crick
+    given: F. H. C.
+  issued:
+    date-parts:
+    - - 1953
+      - 4
+      - 25
+  title: \[aq]Molecular structure of nucleic acids: a structure for
+    deoxyribose nucleic acid\[aq]
+  title-short: Molecular structure of nucleic acids
+  container-title: Nature
+  volume: 171
+  issue: 4356
+  page: 737-738
+  DOI: 10.1038/171737a0
+  URL: https://www.nature.com/articles/171737a0
+  language: en-GB
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+If both an external bibliography and inline (YAML metadata) references
+are provided, both will be used.
+In case of conflicting \f[CR]id\f[R]s, the inline references will take
+precedence.
+.PP
+Note that pandoc can be used to produce such a YAML metadata section
+from a BibTeX, BibLaTeX, or CSL JSON bibliography:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t markdown
+pandoc chem.json -s -f csljson -t markdown
+.EE
+.PP
+Indeed, pandoc can convert between any of these citation formats:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc chem.bib -s -f biblatex -t csljson
+pandoc chem.yaml -s -f markdown -t biblatex
+.EE
+.PP
+Running pandoc on a bibliography file with the \f[CR]--citeproc\f[R]
+option will create a formatted bibliography in the format of your
+choice:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.html
+pandoc chem.bib -s --citeproc -o chem.pdf
+.EE
+.SS Capitalization in titles
+If you are using a bibtex or biblatex bibliography, then observe the
+following rules:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+English titles should be in title case.
+Non-English titles should be in sentence case, and the \f[CR]langid\f[R]
+field in biblatex should be set to the relevant language.
+(The following values are treated as English: \f[CR]american\f[R],
+\f[CR]british\f[R], \f[CR]canadian\f[R], \f[CR]english\f[R],
+\f[CR]australian\f[R], \f[CR]newzealand\f[R], \f[CR]USenglish\f[R], or
+\f[CR]UKenglish\f[R].)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+As is standard with bibtex/biblatex, proper names should be protected
+with curly braces so that they won\[cq]t be lowercased in styles that
+call for sentence case.
+For example:
+.RS 2
+.IP
+.EX
+title = {My Dinner with {Andre}}
+.EE
+.RE
+.IP \[bu] 2
+In addition, words that should remain lowercase (or camelCase) should be
+protected:
+.RS 2
+.IP
+.EX
+title = {Spin Wave Dispersion on the {nm} Scale}
+.EE
+.PP
+Though this is not necessary in bibtex/biblatex, it is necessary with
+citeproc, which stores titles internally in sentence case, and converts
+to title case in styles that require it.
+Here we protect \[lq]nm\[rq] so that it doesn\[cq]t get converted to
+\[lq]Nm\[rq] at this stage.
+.RE
+.PP
+If you are using a CSL bibliography (either JSON or YAML), then observe
+the following rules:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+All titles should be in sentence case.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Use the \f[CR]language\f[R] field for non-English titles to prevent
+their conversion to title case in styles that call for this.
+(Conversion happens only if \f[CR]language\f[R] begins with
+\f[CR]en\f[R] or is left empty.)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Protect words that should not be converted to title case using this
+syntax:
+.RS 2
+.IP
+.EX
+Spin wave dispersion on the <span class=\[dq]nocase\[dq]>nm</span> scale
+.EE
+.RE
+.SS Conference Papers, Published vs.\ Unpublished
+For a formally published conference paper, use the biblatex entry type
+\f[CR]inproceedings\f[R] (which will be mapped to CSL
+\f[CR]paper-conference\f[R]).
+.PP
+For an unpublished manuscript, use the biblatex entry type
+\f[CR]unpublished\f[R] without an \f[CR]eventtitle\f[R] field (this
+entry type will be mapped to CSL \f[CR]manuscript\f[R]).
+.PP
+For a talk, an unpublished conference paper, or a poster presentation,
+use the biblatex entry type \f[CR]unpublished\f[R] with an
+\f[CR]eventtitle\f[R] field (this entry type will be mapped to CSL
+\f[CR]speech\f[R]).
+Use the biblatex \f[CR]type\f[R] field to indicate the type,
+e.g.\ \[lq]Paper\[rq], or \[lq]Poster\[rq].
+\f[CR]venue\f[R] and \f[CR]eventdate\f[R] may be useful too, though
+\f[CR]eventdate\f[R] will not be rendered by most CSL styles.
+Note that \f[CR]venue\f[R] is for the event\[cq]s venue, unlike
+\f[CR]location\f[R] which describes the publisher\[cq]s location; do not
+use the latter for an unpublished conference paper.
+.SS Specifying a citation style
+Citations and references can be formatted using any style supported by
+the Citation Style Language, listed in the Zotero Style Repository.
+These files are specified using the \f[CR]--csl\f[R] option or the
+\f[CR]csl\f[R] (or \f[CR]citation-style\f[R]) metadata field.
+By default, pandoc will use the Chicago Manual of Style author-date
+format.
+(You can override this default by copying a CSL style of your choice to
+\f[CR]default.csl\f[R] in your user data directory.)
+The CSL project provides further information on finding and editing
+styles.
+.PP
+The \f[CR]--citation-abbreviations\f[R] option (or the
+\f[CR]citation-abbreviations\f[R] metadata field) may be used to specify
+a JSON file containing abbreviations of journals that should be used in
+formatted bibliographies when \f[CR]form=\[dq]short\[dq]\f[R] is
+specified.
+The format of the file can be illustrated with an example:
+.IP
+.EX
+{ \[dq]default\[dq]: {
+    \[dq]container-title\[dq]: {
+            \[dq]Lloyd\[aq]s Law Reports\[dq]: \[dq]Lloyd\[aq]s Rep\[dq],
+            \[dq]Estates Gazette\[dq]: \[dq]EG\[dq],
+            \[dq]Scots Law Times\[dq]: \[dq]SLT\[dq]
+    }
+  }
+}
+.EE
+.SS Citations in note styles
+Pandoc\[cq]s citation processing is designed to allow you to move
+between author-date, numerical, and note styles without modifying the
+markdown source.
+When you\[cq]re using a note style, avoid inserting footnotes manually.
+Instead, insert citations just as you would in an author-date
+style\[em]for example,
+.IP
+.EX
+Blah blah [\[at]foo, p. 33].
+.EE
+.PP
+The footnote will be created automatically.
+Pandoc will take care of removing the space and moving the note before
+or after the period, depending on the setting of
+\f[CR]notes-after-punctuation\f[R], as described below in Other relevant
+metadata fields.
+.PP
+In some cases you may need to put a citation inside a regular footnote.
+Normal citations in footnotes (such as \f[CR][\[at]foo, p. 33]\f[R])
+will be rendered in parentheses.
+In-text citations (such as \f[CR]\[at]foo [p. 33]\f[R]) will be rendered
+without parentheses.
+(A comma will be added if appropriate.)
+Thus:
+.IP
+.EX
+[\[ha]1]:  Some studies [\[at]foo; \[at]bar, p. 33] show that
+frubulicious zoosnaps are quantical.  For a survey
+of the literature, see \[at]baz [chap. 1].
+.EE
+.SS Placement of the bibliography
+If the style calls for a list of works cited, it will be placed in a div
+with id \f[CR]refs\f[R], if one exists:
+.IP
+.EX
+::: {#refs}
+:::
+.EE
+.PP
+Otherwise, it will be placed at the end of the document.
+Generation of the bibliography can be suppressed by setting
+\f[CR]suppress-bibliography: true\f[R] in the YAML metadata.
+.PP
+If you wish the bibliography to have a section heading, you can set
+\f[CR]reference-section-title\f[R] in the metadata, or put the heading
+at the beginning of the div with id \f[CR]refs\f[R] (if you are using
+it) or at the end of your document:
+.IP
+.EX
+last paragraph...
+
+# References
+.EE
+.PP
+The bibliography will be inserted after this heading.
+Note that the \f[CR]unnumbered\f[R] class will be added to this heading,
+so that the section will not be numbered.
+.PP
+If you want to put the bibliography into a variable in your template,
+one way to do that is to put the div with id \f[CR]refs\f[R] into a
+metadata field, e.g.
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+refs: |
+   ::: {#refs}
+   :::
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+You can then put the variable \f[CR]$refs$\f[R] into your template where
+you want the bibliography to be placed.
+.SS Including uncited items in the bibliography
+If you want to include items in the bibliography without actually citing
+them in the body text, you can define a dummy \f[CR]nocite\f[R] metadata
+field and put the citations there:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+nocite: |
+  \[at]item1, \[at]item2
+\&...
+
+\[at]item3
+.EE
+.PP
+In this example, the document will contain a citation for
+\f[CR]item3\f[R] only, but the bibliography will contain entries for
+\f[CR]item1\f[R], \f[CR]item2\f[R], and \f[CR]item3\f[R].
+.PP
+It is possible to create a bibliography with all the citations, whether
+or not they appear in the document, by using a wildcard:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+nocite: |
+  \[at]*
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+For LaTeX output, you can also use \f[CR]natbib\f[R] or
+\f[CR]biblatex\f[R] to render the bibliography.
+In order to do so, specify bibliography files as outlined above, and add
+\f[CR]--natbib\f[R] or \f[CR]--biblatex\f[R] argument to pandoc
+invocation.
+Bear in mind that bibliography files have to be in either BibTeX (for
+\f[CR]--natbib\f[R]) or BibLaTeX (for \f[CR]--biblatex\f[R]) format.
+.SS Other relevant metadata fields
+A few other metadata fields affect bibliography formatting:
+.TP
+\f[CR]link-citations\f[R]
+If true, citations will be hyperlinked to the corresponding bibliography
+entries (for author-date and numerical styles only).
+Defaults to false.
+.TP
+\f[CR]link-bibliography\f[R]
+If true, DOIs, PMCIDs, PMID, and URLs in bibliographies will be rendered
+as hyperlinks.
+(If an entry contains a DOI, PMCID, PMID, or URL, but none of these
+fields are rendered by the style, then the title, or in the absence of a
+title the whole entry, will be hyperlinked.)
+Defaults to true.
+.TP
+\f[CR]lang\f[R]
+The \f[CR]lang\f[R] field will affect how the style is localized, for
+example in the translation of labels, the use of quotation marks, and
+the way items are sorted.
+(For backwards compatibility, \f[CR]locale\f[R] may be used instead of
+\f[CR]lang\f[R], but this use is deprecated.)
+.RS
+.PP
+A BCP 47 language tag is expected: for example, \f[CR]en\f[R],
+\f[CR]de\f[R], \f[CR]en-US\f[R], \f[CR]fr-CA\f[R], \f[CR]ug-Cyrl\f[R].
+The unicode extension syntax (after \f[CR]-u-\f[R]) may be used to
+specify options for collation (sorting) more precisely.
+Here are some examples:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]zh-u-co-pinyin\f[R] \[en] Chinese with the Pinyin collation.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]es-u-co-trad\f[R] \[en] Spanish with the traditional collation
+(with \f[CR]Ch\f[R] sorting after \f[CR]C\f[R]).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]fr-u-kb\f[R] \[en] French with \[lq]backwards\[rq] accent sorting
+(with \f[CR]coté\f[R] sorting after \f[CR]côte\f[R]).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]en-US-u-kf-upper\f[R] \[en] English with uppercase letters sorting
+before lower (default is lower before upper).
+.RE
+.TP
+\f[CR]notes-after-punctuation\f[R]
+If true (the default for note styles), pandoc will put footnote
+references or superscripted numerical citations after following
+punctuation.
+For example, if the source contains
+\f[CR]blah blah [\[at]jones99].\f[R], the result will look like
+\f[CR]blah blah.[\[ha]1]\f[R], with the note moved after the period and
+the space collapsed.
+If false, the space will still be collapsed, but the footnote will not
+be moved after the punctuation.
+The option may also be used in numerical styles that use superscripts
+for citation numbers (but for these styles the default is not to move
+the citation).
+.SH SLIDE SHOWS
+You can use pandoc to produce an HTML + JavaScript slide presentation
+that can be viewed via a web browser.
+There are five ways to do this, using S5, DZSlides, Slidy, Slideous, or
+reveal.js.
+You can also produce a PDF slide show using LaTeX \f[CR]beamer\f[R], or
+slide shows in Microsoft PowerPoint format.
+.PP
+Here\[cq]s the Markdown source for a simple slide show,
+\f[CR]habits.txt\f[R]:
+.IP
+.EX
+% Habits
+% John Doe
+% March 22, 2005
+
+# In the morning
+
+## Getting up
+
+- Turn off alarm
+- Get out of bed
+
+## Breakfast
+
+- Eat eggs
+- Drink coffee
+
+# In the evening
+
+## Dinner
+
+- Eat spaghetti
+- Drink wine
+
+------------------
+
+![picture of spaghetti](images/spaghetti.jpg)
+
+## Going to sleep
+
+- Get in bed
+- Count sheep
+.EE
+.PP
+To produce an HTML/JavaScript slide show, simply type
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -t FORMAT -s habits.txt -o habits.html
+.EE
+.PP
+where \f[CR]FORMAT\f[R] is either \f[CR]s5\f[R], \f[CR]slidy\f[R],
+\f[CR]slideous\f[R], \f[CR]dzslides\f[R], or \f[CR]revealjs\f[R].
+.PP
+For Slidy, Slideous, reveal.js, and S5, the file produced by pandoc with
+the \f[CR]-s/--standalone\f[R] option embeds a link to JavaScript and
+CSS files, which are assumed to be available at the relative path
+\f[CR]s5/default\f[R] (for S5), \f[CR]slideous\f[R] (for Slideous),
+\f[CR]reveal.js\f[R] (for reveal.js), or at the Slidy website at
+\f[CR]w3.org\f[R] (for Slidy).
+(These paths can be changed by setting the \f[CR]slidy-url\f[R],
+\f[CR]slideous-url\f[R], \f[CR]revealjs-url\f[R], or \f[CR]s5-url\f[R]
+variables; see Variables for HTML slides, above.)
+For DZSlides, the (relatively short) JavaScript and CSS are included in
+the file by default.
+.PP
+With all HTML slide formats, the \f[CR]--self-contained\f[R] option can
+be used to produce a single file that contains all of the data necessary
+to display the slide show, including linked scripts, stylesheets,
+images, and videos.
+.PP
+To produce a PDF slide show using beamer, type
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -o habits.pdf
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that a reveal.js slide show can also be converted to a PDF by
+printing it to a file from the browser.
+.PP
+To produce a PowerPoint slide show, type
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc habits.txt -o habits.pptx
+.EE
+.SS Structuring the slide show
+By default, the \f[I]slide level\f[R] is the highest heading level in
+the hierarchy that is followed immediately by content, and not another
+heading, somewhere in the document.
+In the example above, level-1 headings are always followed by level-2
+headings, which are followed by content, so the slide level is 2.
+This default can be overridden using the \f[CR]--slide-level\f[R]
+option.
+.PP
+The document is carved up into slides according to the following rules:
+.IP \[bu] 2
+A horizontal rule always starts a new slide.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+A heading at the slide level always starts a new slide.
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Headings \f[I]below\f[R] the slide level in the hierarchy create
+headings \f[I]within\f[R] a slide.
+(In beamer, a \[lq]block\[rq] will be created.
+If the heading has the class \f[CR]example\f[R], an
+\f[CR]exampleblock\f[R] environment will be used; if it has the class
+\f[CR]alert\f[R], an \f[CR]alertblock\f[R] will be used; otherwise a
+regular \f[CR]block\f[R] will be used.)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+Headings \f[I]above\f[R] the slide level in the hierarchy create
+\[lq]title slides,\[rq] which just contain the section title and help to
+break the slide show into sections.
+Non-slide content under these headings will be included on the title
+slide (for HTML slide shows) or in a subsequent slide with the same
+title (for beamer).
+.IP \[bu] 2
+A title page is constructed automatically from the document\[cq]s title
+block, if present.
+(In the case of beamer, this can be disabled by commenting out some
+lines in the default template.)
+.PP
+These rules are designed to support many different styles of slide show.
+If you don\[cq]t care about structuring your slides into sections and
+subsections, you can either just use level-1 headings for all slides (in
+that case, level 1 will be the slide level) or you can set
+\f[CR]--slide-level=0\f[R].
+.PP
+Note: in reveal.js slide shows, if slide level is 2, a two-dimensional
+layout will be produced, with level-1 headings building horizontally and
+level-2 headings building vertically.
+It is not recommended that you use deeper nesting of section levels with
+reveal.js unless you set \f[CR]--slide-level=0\f[R] (which lets
+reveal.js produce a one-dimensional layout and only interprets
+horizontal rules as slide boundaries).
+.SS PowerPoint layout choice
+When creating slides, the pptx writer chooses from a number of
+pre-defined layouts, based on the content of the slide:
+.TP
+Title Slide
+This layout is used for the initial slide, which is generated and filled
+from the metadata fields \f[CR]date\f[R], \f[CR]author\f[R], and
+\f[CR]title\f[R], if they are present.
+.TP
+Section Header
+This layout is used for what pandoc calls \[lq]title slides\[rq], i.e.
+slides which start with a header which is above the slide level in the
+hierarchy.
+.TP
+Two Content
+This layout is used for two-column slides, i.e.\ slides containing a div
+with class \f[CR]columns\f[R] which contains at least two divs with
+class \f[CR]column\f[R].
+.TP
+Comparison
+This layout is used instead of \[lq]Two Content\[rq] for any two-column
+slides in which at least one column contains text followed by non-text
+(e.g.\ an image or a table).
+.TP
+Content with Caption
+This layout is used for any non-two-column slides which contain text
+followed by non-text (e.g.\ an image or a table).
+.TP
+Blank
+This layout is used for any slides which only contain blank content,
+e.g.\ a slide containing only speaker notes, or a slide containing only
+a non-breaking space.
+.TP
+Title and Content
+This layout is used for all slides which do not match the criteria for
+another layout.
+.PP
+These layouts are chosen from the default pptx reference doc included
+with pandoc, unless an alternative reference doc is specified using
+\f[CR]--reference-doc\f[R].
+.SS Incremental lists
+By default, these writers produce lists that display \[lq]all at
+once.\[rq] If you want your lists to display incrementally (one item at
+a time), use the \f[CR]-i\f[R] option.
+If you want a particular list to depart from the default, put it in a
+\f[CR]div\f[R] block with class \f[CR]incremental\f[R] or
+\f[CR]nonincremental\f[R].
+So, for example, using the \f[CR]fenced div\f[R] syntax, the following
+would be incremental regardless of the document default:
+.IP
+.EX
+::: incremental
+
+- Eat spaghetti
+- Drink wine
+
+:::
+.EE
+.PP
+or
+.IP
+.EX
+::: nonincremental
+
+- Eat spaghetti
+- Drink wine
+
+:::
+.EE
+.PP
+While using \f[CR]incremental\f[R] and \f[CR]nonincremental\f[R] divs is
+the recommended method of setting incremental lists on a per-case basis,
+an older method is also supported: putting lists inside a blockquote
+will depart from the document default (that is, it will display
+incrementally without the \f[CR]-i\f[R] option and all at once with the
+\f[CR]-i\f[R] option):
+.IP
+.EX
+> - Eat spaghetti
+> - Drink wine
+.EE
+.PP
+Both methods allow incremental and nonincremental lists to be mixed in a
+single document.
+.PP
+If you want to include a block-quoted list, you can work around this
+behavior by putting the list inside a fenced div, so that it is not the
+direct child of the block quote:
+.IP
+.EX
+> ::: wrapper
+> - a
+> - list in a quote
+> :::
+.EE
+.SS Inserting pauses
+You can add \[lq]pauses\[rq] within a slide by including a paragraph
+containing three dots, separated by spaces:
+.IP
+.EX
+# Slide with a pause
+
+content before the pause
+
+\&. . .
+
+content after the pause
+.EE
+.PP
+Note: this feature is not yet implemented for PowerPoint output.
+.SS Styling the slides
+You can change the style of HTML slides by putting customized CSS files
+in \f[CR]$DATADIR/s5/default\f[R] (for S5), \f[CR]$DATADIR/slidy\f[R]
+(for Slidy), or \f[CR]$DATADIR/slideous\f[R] (for Slideous), where
+\f[CR]$DATADIR\f[R] is the user data directory (see
+\f[CR]--data-dir\f[R], above).
+The originals may be found in pandoc\[cq]s system data directory
+(generally \f[CR]$CABALDIR/pandoc-VERSION/s5/default\f[R]).
+Pandoc will look there for any files it does not find in the user data
+directory.
+.PP
+For dzslides, the CSS is included in the HTML file itself, and may be
+modified there.
+.PP
+All reveal.js configuration options can be set through variables.
+For example, themes can be used by setting the \f[CR]theme\f[R]
+variable:
+.IP
+.EX
+-V theme=moon
+.EE
+.PP
+Or you can specify a custom stylesheet using the \f[CR]--css\f[R]
+option.
+.PP
+To style beamer slides, you can specify a \f[CR]theme\f[R],
+\f[CR]colortheme\f[R], \f[CR]fonttheme\f[R], \f[CR]innertheme\f[R], and
+\f[CR]outertheme\f[R], using the \f[CR]-V\f[R] option:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -t beamer habits.txt -V theme:Warsaw -o habits.pdf
+.EE
+.PP
+Note that heading attributes will turn into slide attributes (on a
+\f[CR]<div>\f[R] or \f[CR]<section>\f[R]) in HTML slide formats,
+allowing you to style individual slides.
+In beamer, a number of heading classes and attributes are recognized as
+frame options and will be passed through as options to the frame: see
+Frame attributes in beamer, below.
+.SS Speaker notes
+Speaker notes are supported in reveal.js, PowerPoint (pptx), and beamer
+output.
+You can add notes to your Markdown document thus:
+.IP
+.EX
+::: notes
+
+This is my note.
+
+- It can contain Markdown
+- like this list
+
+:::
+.EE
+.PP
+To show the notes window in reveal.js, press \f[CR]s\f[R] while viewing
+the presentation.
+Speaker notes in PowerPoint will be available, as usual, in handouts and
+presenter view.
+.PP
+Notes are not yet supported for other slide formats, but the notes will
+not appear on the slides themselves.
+.SS Columns
+To put material in side by side columns, you can use a native div
+container with class \f[CR]columns\f[R], containing two or more div
+containers with class \f[CR]column\f[R] and a \f[CR]width\f[R]
+attribute:
+.IP
+.EX
+:::::::::::::: {.columns}
+::: {.column width=\[dq]40%\[dq]}
+contents...
+:::
+::: {.column width=\[dq]60%\[dq]}
+contents...
+:::
+::::::::::::::
+.EE
+.SS Additional columns attributes in beamer
+The div containers with classes \f[CR]columns\f[R] and \f[CR]column\f[R]
+can optionally have an \f[CR]align\f[R] attribute.
+The class \f[CR]columns\f[R] can optionally have a \f[CR]totalwidth\f[R]
+attribute or an \f[CR]onlytextwidth\f[R] class.
+.IP
+.EX
+:::::::::::::: {.columns align=center totalwidth=8em}
+::: {.column width=\[dq]40%\[dq]}
+contents...
+:::
+::: {.column width=\[dq]60%\[dq] align=bottom}
+contents...
+:::
+::::::::::::::
+.EE
+.PP
+The \f[CR]align\f[R] attributes on \f[CR]columns\f[R] and
+\f[CR]column\f[R] can be used with the values \f[CR]top\f[R],
+\f[CR]top-baseline\f[R], \f[CR]center\f[R] and \f[CR]bottom\f[R] to
+vertically align the columns.
+It defaults to \f[CR]top\f[R] in \f[CR]columns\f[R].
+.PP
+The \f[CR]totalwidth\f[R] attribute limits the width of the columns to
+the given value.
+.IP
+.EX
+:::::::::::::: {.columns align=top .onlytextwidth}
+::: {.column width=\[dq]40%\[dq] align=center}
+contents...
+:::
+::: {.column width=\[dq]60%\[dq]}
+contents...
+:::
+::::::::::::::
+.EE
+.PP
+The class \f[CR]onlytextwidth\f[R] sets the \f[CR]totalwidth\f[R] to
+\f[CR]\[rs]textwidth\f[R].
+.PP
+See Section 12.7 of the Beamer User\[cq]s Guide for more details.
+.SS Frame attributes in beamer
+Sometimes it is necessary to add the LaTeX \f[CR][fragile]\f[R] option
+to a frame in beamer (for example, when using the \f[CR]minted\f[R]
+environment).
+This can be forced by adding the \f[CR]fragile\f[R] class to the heading
+introducing the slide:
+.IP
+.EX
+# Fragile slide {.fragile}
+.EE
+.PP
+All of the other frame attributes described in Section 8.1 of the Beamer
+User\[cq]s Guide may also be used: \f[CR]allowdisplaybreaks\f[R],
+\f[CR]allowframebreaks\f[R], \f[CR]b\f[R], \f[CR]c\f[R], \f[CR]s\f[R],
+\f[CR]t\f[R], \f[CR]environment\f[R], \f[CR]label\f[R],
+\f[CR]plain\f[R], \f[CR]shrink\f[R], \f[CR]standout\f[R],
+\f[CR]noframenumbering\f[R], \f[CR]squeeze\f[R].
+\f[CR]allowframebreaks\f[R] is recommended especially for
+bibliographies, as it allows multiple slides to be created if the
+content overfills the frame:
+.IP
+.EX
+# References {.allowframebreaks}
+.EE
+.PP
+In addition, the \f[CR]frameoptions\f[R] attribute may be used to pass
+arbitrary frame options to a beamer slide:
+.IP
+.EX
+# Heading {frameoptions=\[dq]squeeze,shrink,customoption=foobar\[dq]}
+.EE
+.SS Background in reveal.js, beamer, and pptx
+Background images can be added to self-contained reveal.js slide shows,
+beamer slide shows, and pptx slide shows.
+.SS On all slides (beamer, reveal.js, pptx)
+With beamer and reveal.js, the configuration option
+\f[CR]background-image\f[R] can be used either in the YAML metadata
+block or as a command-line variable to get the same image on every
+slide.
+.PP
+Note that for reveal.js, the \f[CR]background-image\f[R] will be used as
+a \f[CR]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R] (see below).
+.PP
+For pptx, you can use a reference doc in which background images have
+been set on the relevant layouts.
+.SS \f[CR]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R] (reveal.js)
+For reveal.js, there is also the reveal.js-native option
+\f[CR]parallaxBackgroundImage\f[R], which produces a parallax scrolling
+background.
+You must also set \f[CR]parallaxBackgroundSize\f[R], and can optionally
+set \f[CR]parallaxBackgroundHorizontal\f[R] and
+\f[CR]parallaxBackgroundVertical\f[R] to configure the scrolling
+behaviour.
+See the reveal.js documentation for more details about the meaning of
+these options.
+.PP
+In reveal.js\[cq]s overview mode, the parallaxBackgroundImage will show
+up only on the first slide.
+.SS On individual slides (reveal.js, pptx)
+To set an image for a particular reveal.js or pptx slide, add
+\f[CR]{background-image=\[dq]/path/to/image\[dq]}\f[R] to the first
+slide-level heading on the slide (which may even be empty).
+.PP
+As the HTML writers pass unknown attributes through, other reveal.js
+background settings also work on individual slides, including
+\f[CR]background-size\f[R], \f[CR]background-repeat\f[R],
+\f[CR]background-color\f[R], \f[CR]transition\f[R], and
+\f[CR]transition-speed\f[R].
+(The \f[CR]data-\f[R] prefix will automatically be added.)
+.PP
+Note: \f[CR]data-background-image\f[R] is also supported in pptx for
+consistency with reveal.js \[en] if \f[CR]background-image\f[R]
+isn\[cq]t found, \f[CR]data-background-image\f[R] will be checked.
+.SS On the title slide (reveal.js, pptx)
+To add a background image to the automatically generated title slide for
+reveal.js, use the \f[CR]title-slide-attributes\f[R] variable in the
+YAML metadata block.
+It must contain a map of attribute names and values.
+(Note that the \f[CR]data-\f[R] prefix is required here, as it isn\[cq]t
+added automatically.)
+.PP
+For pptx, pass a reference doc with the background image set on the
+\[lq]Title Slide\[rq] layout.
+.SS Example (reveal.js)
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+title: My Slide Show
+parallaxBackgroundImage: /path/to/my/background_image.png
+title-slide-attributes:
+    data-background-image: /path/to/title_image.png
+    data-background-size: contain
+---
+
+## Slide One
+
+Slide 1 has background_image.png as its background.
+
+## {background-image=\[dq]/path/to/special_image.jpg\[dq]}
+
+Slide 2 has a special image for its background, even though the heading has no content.
+.EE
+.SH EPUBS
+.SS EPUB Metadata
+EPUB metadata may be specified using the \f[CR]--epub-metadata\f[R]
+option, but if the source document is Markdown, it is better to use a
+YAML metadata block.
+Here is an example:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+title:
+- type: main
+  text: My Book
+- type: subtitle
+  text: An investigation of metadata
+creator:
+- role: author
+  text: John Smith
+- role: editor
+  text: Sarah Jones
+identifier:
+- scheme: DOI
+  text: doi:10.234234.234/33
+publisher:  My Press
+rights: © 2007 John Smith, CC BY-NC
+ibooks:
+  version: 1.3.4
+\&...
+.EE
+.PP
+The following fields are recognized:
+.TP
+\f[CR]identifier\f[R]
+Either a string value or an object with fields \f[CR]text\f[R] and
+\f[CR]scheme\f[R].
+Valid values for \f[CR]scheme\f[R] are \f[CR]ISBN-10\f[R],
+\f[CR]GTIN-13\f[R], \f[CR]UPC\f[R], \f[CR]ISMN-10\f[R], \f[CR]DOI\f[R],
+\f[CR]LCCN\f[R], \f[CR]GTIN-14\f[R], \f[CR]ISBN-13\f[R],
+\f[CR]Legal deposit number\f[R], \f[CR]URN\f[R], \f[CR]OCLC\f[R],
+\f[CR]ISMN-13\f[R], \f[CR]ISBN-A\f[R], \f[CR]JP\f[R], \f[CR]OLCC\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]title\f[R]
+Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[CR]file-as\f[R] and
+\f[CR]type\f[R], or a list of such objects.
+Valid values for \f[CR]type\f[R] are \f[CR]main\f[R],
+\f[CR]subtitle\f[R], \f[CR]short\f[R], \f[CR]collection\f[R],
+\f[CR]edition\f[R], \f[CR]extended\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]creator\f[R]
+Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[CR]role\f[R],
+\f[CR]file-as\f[R], and \f[CR]text\f[R], or a list of such objects.
+Valid values for \f[CR]role\f[R] are MARC relators, but pandoc will
+attempt to translate the human-readable versions (like \[lq]author\[rq]
+and \[lq]editor\[rq]) to the appropriate marc relators.
+.TP
+\f[CR]contributor\f[R]
+Same format as \f[CR]creator\f[R].
+.TP
+\f[CR]date\f[R]
+A string value in \f[CR]YYYY-MM-DD\f[R] format.
+(Only the year is necessary.)
+Pandoc will attempt to convert other common date formats.
+.TP
+\f[CR]lang\f[R] (or legacy: \f[CR]language\f[R])
+A string value in BCP 47 format.
+Pandoc will default to the local language if nothing is specified.
+.TP
+\f[CR]subject\f[R]
+Either a string value, or an object with fields \f[CR]text\f[R],
+\f[CR]authority\f[R], and \f[CR]term\f[R], or a list of such objects.
+Valid values for \f[CR]authority\f[R] are either a reserved authority
+value (currently \f[CR]AAT\f[R], \f[CR]BIC\f[R], \f[CR]BISAC\f[R],
+\f[CR]CLC\f[R], \f[CR]DDC\f[R], \f[CR]CLIL\f[R], \f[CR]EuroVoc\f[R],
+\f[CR]MEDTOP\f[R], \f[CR]LCSH\f[R], \f[CR]NDC\f[R], \f[CR]Thema\f[R],
+\f[CR]UDC\f[R], and \f[CR]WGS\f[R]) or an absolute IRI identifying a
+custom scheme.
+Valid values for \f[CR]term\f[R] are defined by the scheme.
+.TP
+\f[CR]description\f[R]
+A string value.
+.TP
+\f[CR]type\f[R]
+A string value.
+.TP
+\f[CR]format\f[R]
+A string value.
+.TP
+\f[CR]relation\f[R]
+A string value.
+.TP
+\f[CR]coverage\f[R]
+A string value.
+.TP
+\f[CR]rights\f[R]
+A string value.
+.TP
+\f[CR]belongs-to-collection\f[R]
+A string value.
+Identifies the name of a collection to which the EPUB Publication
+belongs.
+.TP
+\f[CR]group-position\f[R]
+The \f[CR]group-position\f[R] field indicates the numeric position in
+which the EPUB Publication belongs relative to other works belonging to
+the same \f[CR]belongs-to-collection\f[R] field.
+.TP
+\f[CR]cover-image\f[R]
+A string value (path to cover image).
+.TP
+\f[CR]css\f[R] (or legacy: \f[CR]stylesheet\f[R])
+A string value (path to CSS stylesheet).
+.TP
+\f[CR]page-progression-direction\f[R]
+Either \f[CR]ltr\f[R] or \f[CR]rtl\f[R].
+Specifies the \f[CR]page-progression-direction\f[R] attribute for the
+\f[CR]spine\f[R] element.
+.TP
+\f[CR]ibooks\f[R]
+iBooks-specific metadata, with the following fields:
+.RS
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]version\f[R]: (string)
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]specified-fonts\f[R]: \f[CR]true\f[R]|\f[CR]false\f[R] (default
+\f[CR]false\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]ipad-orientation-lock\f[R]:
+\f[CR]portrait-only\f[R]|\f[CR]landscape-only\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]iphone-orientation-lock\f[R]:
+\f[CR]portrait-only\f[R]|\f[CR]landscape-only\f[R]
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]binding\f[R]: \f[CR]true\f[R]|\f[CR]false\f[R] (default
+\f[CR]true\f[R])
+.IP \[bu] 2
+\f[CR]scroll-axis\f[R]:
+\f[CR]vertical\f[R]|\f[CR]horizontal\f[R]|\f[CR]default\f[R]
+.RE
+.SS The \f[CR]epub:type\f[R] attribute
+For \f[CR]epub3\f[R] output, you can mark up the heading that
+corresponds to an EPUB chapter using the \f[CR]epub:type\f[R] attribute.
+For example, to set the attribute to the value \f[CR]prologue\f[R], use
+this markdown:
+.IP
+.EX
+# My chapter {epub:type=prologue}
+.EE
+.PP
+Which will result in:
+.IP
+.EX
+<body epub:type=\[dq]frontmatter\[dq]>
+  <section epub:type=\[dq]prologue\[dq]>
+    <h1>My chapter</h1>
+.EE
+.PP
+Pandoc will output \f[CR]<body epub:type=\[dq]bodymatter\[dq]>\f[R],
+unless you use one of the following values, in which case either
+\f[CR]frontmatter\f[R] or \f[CR]backmatter\f[R] will be output.
+.RS -14n
+.IP
+.EX
+  epub:type of first section   epub:type of body
+  ---------------------------- -------------------
+  prologue                     frontmatter
+  abstract                     frontmatter
+  acknowledgments              frontmatter
+  copyright-page               frontmatter
+  dedication                   frontmatter
+  credits                      frontmatter
+  keywords                     frontmatter
+  imprint                      frontmatter
+  contributors                 frontmatter
+  other-credits                frontmatter
+  errata                       frontmatter
+  revision-history             frontmatter
+  titlepage                    frontmatter
+  halftitlepage                frontmatter
+  seriespage                   frontmatter
+  foreword                     frontmatter
+  preface                      frontmatter
+  frontispiece                 frontmatter
+  appendix                     backmatter
+  colophon                     backmatter
+  bibliography                 backmatter
+  index                        backmatter
+.EE
+.RE
+.SS Linked media
+By default, pandoc will download media referenced from any
+\f[CR]<img>\f[R], \f[CR]<audio>\f[R], \f[CR]<video>\f[R] or
+\f[CR]<source>\f[R] element present in the generated EPUB, and include
+it in the EPUB container, yielding a completely self-contained EPUB.
+If you want to link to external media resources instead, use raw HTML in
+your source and add \f[CR]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] to the tag with
+the \f[CR]src\f[R] attribute.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+<audio controls=\[dq]1\[dq]>
+  <source src=\[dq]https://example.com/music/toccata.mp3\[dq]
+          data-external=\[dq]1\[dq] type=\[dq]audio/mpeg\[dq]>
+  </source>
+</audio>
+.EE
+.PP
+If the input format already is HTML then
+\f[CR]data-external=\[dq]1\[dq]\f[R] will work as expected for
+\f[CR]<img>\f[R] elements.
+Similarly, for Markdown, external images can be declared with
+\f[CR]![img](url){external=1}\f[R].
+Note that this only works for images; the other media elements have no
+native representation in pandoc\[cq]s AST and require the use of raw
+HTML.
+.SS EPUB styling
+By default, pandoc will include some basic styling contained in its
+\f[CR]epub.css\f[R] data file.
+(To see this, use \f[CR]pandoc --print-default-data-file epub.css\f[R].)
+To use a different CSS file, just use the \f[CR]--css\f[R] command line
+option.
+A few inline styles are defined in addition; these are essential for
+correct formatting of pandoc\[cq]s HTML output.
+.PP
+The \f[CR]document-css\f[R] variable may be set if the more opinionated
+styling of pandoc\[cq]s default HTML templates is desired (and in that
+case the variables defined in Variables for HTML may be used to
+fine-tune the style).
+.SH CHUNKED HTML
+\f[CR]pandoc -t chunkedhtml\f[R] will produce a zip archive of linked
+HTML files, one for each section of the original document.
+Internal links will automatically be adjusted to point to the right
+place, images linked to under the working directory will be
+incorporated, and navigation links will be added.
+In addition, a JSON file \f[CR]sitemap.json\f[R] will be included
+describing the hierarchical structure of the files.
+.PP
+If an output file without an extension is specified, then it will be
+interpreted as a directory and the zip archive will be automatically
+unpacked into it (unless it already exists, in which case an error will
+be raised).
+Otherwise a \f[CR].zip\f[R] file will be produced.
+.PP
+The navigation links can be customized by adjusting the template.
+By default, a table of contents is included only on the top page.
+To include it on every page, set the \f[CR]toc\f[R] variable manually.
+.SH JUPYTER NOTEBOOKS
+When creating a Jupyter notebook, pandoc will try to infer the notebook
+structure.
+Code blocks with the class \f[CR]code\f[R] will be taken as code cells,
+and intervening content will be taken as Markdown cells.
+Attachments will automatically be created for images in Markdown cells.
+Metadata will be taken from the \f[CR]jupyter\f[R] metadata field.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+---
+title: My notebook
+jupyter:
+  nbformat: 4
+  nbformat_minor: 5
+  kernelspec:
+     display_name: Python 2
+     language: python
+     name: python2
+  language_info:
+     codemirror_mode:
+       name: ipython
+       version: 2
+     file_extension: \[dq].py\[dq]
+     mimetype: \[dq]text/x-python\[dq]
+     name: \[dq]python\[dq]
+     nbconvert_exporter: \[dq]python\[dq]
+     pygments_lexer: \[dq]ipython2\[dq]
+     version: \[dq]2.7.15\[dq]
+---
+
+# Lorem ipsum
+
+**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
+bibendum felis dictum sodales.
+
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] code
+print(\[dq]hello\[dq])
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+
+## Pyout
+
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] code
+from IPython.display import HTML
+HTML(\[dq]\[dq]\[dq]
+<script>
+console.log(\[dq]hello\[dq]);
+</script>
+<b>HTML</b>
+\[dq]\[dq]\[dq])
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+
+## Image
+
+This image ![image](myimage.png) will be
+included as a cell attachment.
+.EE
+.PP
+If you want to add cell attributes, group cells differently, or add
+output to code cells, then you need to include divs to indicate the
+structure.
+You can use either fenced divs or native divs for this.
+Here is an example:
+.IP
+.EX
+:::::: {.cell .markdown}
+# Lorem
+
+**Lorem ipsum** dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit. Nunc luctus
+bibendum felis dictum sodales.
+::::::
+
+:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=1}
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] {.python}
+print(\[dq]hello\[dq])
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+
+::: {.output .stream .stdout}
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+hello
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+:::
+::::::
+
+:::::: {.cell .code execution_count=2}
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga] {.python}
+from IPython.display import HTML
+HTML(\[dq]\[dq]\[dq]
+<script>
+console.log(\[dq]hello\[dq]);
+</script>
+<b>HTML</b>
+\[dq]\[dq]\[dq])
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+
+::: {.output .execute_result execution_count=2}
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]{=html}
+<script>
+console.log(\[dq]hello\[dq]);
+</script>
+<b>HTML</b>
+hello
+\[ga]\[ga]\[ga]
+:::
+::::::
+.EE
+.PP
+If you include raw HTML or TeX in an output cell, use the raw attribute,
+as shown in the last cell of the example above.
+Although pandoc can process \[lq]bare\[rq] raw HTML and TeX, the result
+is often interspersed raw elements and normal textual elements, and in
+an output cell pandoc expects a single, connected raw block.
+To avoid using raw HTML or TeX except when marked explicitly using raw
+attributes, we recommend specifying the extensions
+\f[CR]-raw_html-raw_tex+raw_attribute\f[R] when translating between
+Markdown and ipynb notebooks.
+.PP
+Note that options and extensions that affect reading and writing of
+Markdown will also affect Markdown cells in ipynb notebooks.
+For example, \f[CR]--wrap=preserve\f[R] will preserve soft line breaks
+in Markdown cells; \f[CR]--markdown-headings=setext\f[R] will cause
+Setext-style headings to be used; and \f[CR]--preserve-tabs\f[R] will
+prevent tabs from being turned to spaces.
+.SH SYNTAX HIGHLIGHTING
+Pandoc will automatically highlight syntax in fenced code blocks that
+are marked with a language name.
+The Haskell library skylighting is used for highlighting.
+Currently highlighting is supported only for HTML, EPUB, Docx, Ms, and
+LaTeX/PDF output.
+To see a list of language names that pandoc will recognize, type
+\f[CR]pandoc --list-highlight-languages\f[R].
+.PP
+The color scheme can be selected using the \f[CR]--highlight-style\f[R]
+option.
+The default color scheme is \f[CR]pygments\f[R], which imitates the
+default color scheme used by the Python library pygments (though
+pygments is not actually used to do the highlighting).
+To see a list of highlight styles, type
+\f[CR]pandoc --list-highlight-styles\f[R].
+.PP
+If you are not satisfied with the predefined styles, you can use
+\f[CR]--print-highlight-style\f[R] to generate a JSON \f[CR].theme\f[R]
+file which can be modified and used as the argument to
+\f[CR]--highlight-style\f[R].
+To get a JSON version of the \f[CR]pygments\f[R] style, for example:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --print-highlight-style pygments > my.theme
+.EE
+.PP
+Then edit \f[CR]my.theme\f[R] and use it like this:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --highlight-style my.theme
+.EE
+.PP
+If you are not satisfied with the built-in highlighting, or you want to
+highlight a language that isn\[cq]t supported, you can use the
+\f[CR]--syntax-definition\f[R] option to load a KDE-style XML syntax
+definition file.
+Before writing your own, have a look at KDE\[cq]s repository of syntax
+definitions.
+.PP
+To disable highlighting, use the \f[CR]--no-highlight\f[R] option.
+.SH CUSTOM STYLES
+Custom styles can be used in the docx and ICML formats.
+.SS Output
+By default, pandoc\[cq]s docx and ICML output applies a predefined set
+of styles for blocks such as paragraphs and block quotes, and uses
+largely default formatting (italics, bold) for inlines.
+This will work for most purposes, especially alongside a
+\f[CR]reference.docx\f[R] file.
+However, if you need to apply your own styles to blocks, or match a
+preexisting set of styles, pandoc allows you to define custom styles for
+blocks and text using \f[CR]div\f[R]s and \f[CR]span\f[R]s,
+respectively.
+.PP
+If you define a \f[CR]div\f[R] or \f[CR]span\f[R] with the attribute
+\f[CR]custom-style\f[R], pandoc will apply your specified style to the
+contained elements (with the exception of elements whose function
+depends on a style, like headings, code blocks, block quotes, or links).
+So, for example, using the \f[CR]bracketed_spans\f[R] syntax,
+.IP
+.EX
+[Get out]{custom-style=\[dq]Emphatically\[dq]}, he said.
+.EE
+.PP
+would produce a docx file with \[lq]Get out\[rq] styled with character
+style \f[CR]Emphatically\f[R].
+Similarly, using the \f[CR]fenced_divs\f[R] syntax,
+.IP
+.EX
+Dickinson starts the poem simply:
+
+::: {custom-style=\[dq]Poetry\[dq]}
+| A Bird came down the Walk---
+| He did not know I saw---
+:::
+.EE
+.PP
+would style the two contained lines with the \f[CR]Poetry\f[R] paragraph
+style.
+.PP
+For docx output, styles will be defined in the output file as inheriting
+from normal text, if the styles are not yet in your reference.docx.
+If they are already defined, pandoc will not alter the definition.
+.PP
+This feature allows for greatest customization in conjunction with
+pandoc filters.
+If you want all paragraphs after block quotes to be indented, you can
+write a filter to apply the styles necessary.
+If you want all italics to be transformed to the \f[CR]Emphasis\f[R]
+character style (perhaps to change their color), you can write a filter
+which will transform all italicized inlines to inlines within an
+\f[CR]Emphasis\f[R] custom-style \f[CR]span\f[R].
+.PP
+For docx output, you don\[cq]t need to enable any extensions for custom
+styles to work.
+.SS Input
+The docx reader, by default, only reads those styles that it can convert
+into pandoc elements, either by direct conversion or interpreting the
+derivation of the input document\[cq]s styles.
+.PP
+By enabling the \f[CR]styles\f[R] extension in the docx reader
+(\f[CR]-f docx+styles\f[R]), you can produce output that maintains the
+styles of the input document, using the \f[CR]custom-style\f[R] class.
+Paragraph styles are interpreted as divs, while character styles are
+interpreted as spans.
+.PP
+For example, using the \f[CR]custom-style-reference.docx\f[R] file in
+the test directory, we have the following different outputs:
+.PP
+Without the \f[CR]+styles\f[R] extension:
+.IP
+.EX
+$ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx -t markdown
+This is some text.
+
+This is text with an *emphasized* text style. And this is text with a
+**strengthened** text style.
+
+> Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
+.EE
+.PP
+And with the extension:
+.IP
+.EX
+$ pandoc test/docx/custom-style-reference.docx -f docx+styles -t markdown
+
+::: {custom-style=\[dq]First Paragraph\[dq]}
+This is some text.
+:::
+
+::: {custom-style=\[dq]Body Text\[dq]}
+This is text with an [emphasized]{custom-style=\[dq]Emphatic\[dq]} text style.
+And this is text with a [strengthened]{custom-style=\[dq]Strengthened\[dq]}
+text style.
+:::
+
+::: {custom-style=\[dq]My Block Style\[dq]}
+> Here is a styled paragraph that inherits from Block Text.
+:::
+.EE
+.PP
+With these custom styles, you can use your input document as a
+reference-doc while creating docx output (see below), and maintain the
+same styles in your input and output files.
+.SH CUSTOM READERS AND WRITERS
+Pandoc can be extended with custom readers and writers written in Lua.
+(Pandoc includes a Lua interpreter, so Lua need not be installed
+separately.)
+.PP
+To use a custom reader or writer, simply specify the path to the Lua
+script in place of the input or output format.
+For example:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc -t data/sample.lua
+pandoc -f my_custom_markup_language.lua -t latex -s
+.EE
+.PP
+If the script is not found relative to the working directory, it will be
+sought in the \f[CR]custom\f[R] subdirectory of the user data directory
+(see \f[CR]--data-dir\f[R]).
+.PP
+A custom reader is a Lua script that defines one function, Reader, which
+takes a string as input and returns a Pandoc AST.
+See the Lua filters documentation for documentation of the functions
+that are available for creating pandoc AST elements.
+For parsing, the lpeg parsing library is available by default.
+To see a sample custom reader:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --print-default-data-file creole.lua
+.EE
+.PP
+If you want your custom reader to have access to reader options
+(e.g.\ the tab stop setting), you give your Reader function a second
+\f[CR]options\f[R] parameter.
+.PP
+A custom writer is a Lua script that defines a function that specifies
+how to render each element in a Pandoc AST.
+See the djot-writer.lua for a full-featured example.
+.PP
+Note that custom writers have no default template.
+If you want to use \f[CR]--standalone\f[R] with a custom writer, you
+will need to specify a template manually using \f[CR]--template\f[R] or
+add a new default template with the name
+\f[CR]default.NAME_OF_CUSTOM_WRITER.lua\f[R] to the \f[CR]templates\f[R]
+subdirectory of your user data directory (see Templates).
+.SH REPRODUCIBLE BUILDS
+Some of the document formats pandoc targets (such as EPUB, docx, and
+ODT) include build timestamps in the generated document.
+That means that the files generated on successive builds will differ,
+even if the source does not.
+To avoid this, set the \f[CR]SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\f[R] environment
+variable, and the timestamp will be taken from it instead of the current
+time.
+\f[CR]SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH\f[R] should contain an integer unix timestamp
+(specifying the number of seconds since midnight UTC January 1, 1970).
+.PP
+Some document formats also include a unique identifier.
+For EPUB, this can be set explicitly by setting the
+\f[CR]identifier\f[R] metadata field (see EPUB Metadata, above).
+.SH ACCESSIBLE PDFS AND PDF ARCHIVING STANDARDS
+PDF is a flexible format, and using PDF in certain contexts requires
+additional conventions.
+For example, PDFs are not accessible by default; they define how
+characters are placed on a page but do not contain semantic information
+on the content.
+However, it is possible to generate accessible PDFs, which use tagging
+to add semantic information to the document.
+.PP
+Pandoc defaults to LaTeX to generate PDF.
+Tagging support in LaTeX is in development and not readily available, so
+PDFs generated in this way will always be untagged and not accessible.
+This means that alternative engines must be used to generate accessible
+PDFs.
+.PP
+The PDF standards PDF/A and PDF/UA define further restrictions intended
+to optimize PDFs for archiving and accessibility.
+Tagging is commonly used in combination with these standards to ensure
+best results.
+.PP
+Note, however, that standard compliance depends on many things,
+including the colorspace of embedded images.
+Pandoc cannot check this, and external programs must be used to ensure
+that generated PDFs are in compliance.
+.SS ConTeXt
+ConTeXt always produces tagged PDFs, but the quality depends on the
+input.
+The default ConTeXt markup generated by pandoc is optimized for
+readability and reuse, not tagging.
+Enable the \f[CR]tagging\f[R] format extension to force markup that is
+optimized for tagging.
+This can be combined with the \f[CR]pdfa\f[R] variable to generate
+standard-compliant PDFs.
+E.g.:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --to=context+tagging -V pdfa=3a
+.EE
+.PP
+A recent \f[CR]context\f[R] version should be used, as older versions
+contained a bug that lead to invalid PDF metadata.
+.SS WeasyPrint
+The HTML-based engine WeasyPrint includes experimental support for PDF/A
+and PDF/UA since version 57.
+Tagged PDFs can created with
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --pdf-engine=weasyprint \[rs]
+       --pdf-engine-opt=--pdf-variant=pdf/ua-1 ...
+.EE
+.PP
+The feature is experimental and standard compliance should not be
+assumed.
+.SS Prince XML
+The non-free HTML-to-PDf converter \f[CR]prince\f[R] has extensive
+support for various PDF standards as well as tagging.
+E.g.:
+.IP
+.EX
+pandoc --pdf-engine=prince \[rs]
+       --pdf-engine-opt=--tagged-pdf ...
+.EE
+.PP
+See the prince documentation for more info.
+.SS Word Processors
+Word processors like LibreOffice and MS Word can also be used to
+generate standardized and tagged PDF output.
+Pandoc does not support direct conversions via these tools.
+However, pandoc can convert a document to a \f[CR]docx\f[R] or
+\f[CR]odt\f[R] file, which can then be opened and converted to PDF with
+the respective word processor.
+See the documentation for Word and LibreOffice.
+.SH RUNNING PANDOC AS A WEB SERVER
+If you rename (or symlink) the pandoc executable to
+\f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R], or if you call pandoc with \f[CR]server\f[R]
+as the first argument, it will start up a web server with a JSON API.
+This server exposes most of the conversion functionality of pandoc.
+For full documentation, see the pandoc-server man page.
+.PP
+If you rename (or symlink) the pandoc executable to
+\f[CR]pandoc-server.cgi\f[R], it will function as a CGI program exposing
+the same API as \f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R].
+.PP
+\f[CR]pandoc-server\f[R] is designed to be maximally secure; it uses
+Haskell\[cq]s type system to provide strong guarantees that no I/O will
+be performed on the server during pandoc conversions.
+.SH RUNNING PANDOC AS A LUA INTERPRETER
+Calling the pandoc executable under the name \f[CR]pandoc-lua\f[R] or
+with \f[CR]lua\f[R] as the first argument will make it function as a
+standalone Lua interpreter.
+The behavior is mostly identical to that of the standalone
+\f[CR]lua\f[R] executable, version 5.4.
+However, there is no REPL yet, and the \f[CR]-i\f[R] option has no
+effect.
+For full documentation, see the pandoc-lua man page.
+.SH A NOTE ON SECURITY
+.IP "1." 3
+Although pandoc itself will not create or modify any files other than
+those you explicitly ask it create (with the exception of temporary
+files used in producing PDFs), a filter or custom writer could in
+principle do anything on your file system.
+Please audit filters and custom writers very carefully before using
+them.
+.IP "2." 3
+Several input formats (including HTML, Org, and RST) support
+\f[CR]include\f[R] directives that allow the contents of a file to be
+included in the output.
+An untrusted attacker could use these to view the contents of files on
+the file system.
+(Using the \f[CR]--sandbox\f[R] option can protect against this threat.)
+.IP "3." 3
+Several output formats (including RTF, FB2, HTML with
+\f[CR]--self-contained\f[R], EPUB, Docx, and ODT) will embed encoded or
+raw images into the output file.
+An untrusted attacker could exploit this to view the contents of
+non-image files on the file system.
+(Using the \f[CR]--sandbox\f[R] option can protect against this threat,
+but will also prevent including images in these formats.)
+.IP "4." 3
+If your application uses pandoc as a Haskell library (rather than
+shelling out to the executable), it is possible to use it in a mode that
+fully isolates pandoc from your file system, by running the pandoc
+operations in the \f[CR]PandocPure\f[R] monad.
+See the document Using the pandoc API for more details.
+(This corresponds to the use of the \f[CR]--sandbox\f[R] option on the
+command line.)
+.IP "5." 3
+Pandoc\[cq]s parsers can exhibit pathological performance on some corner
+cases.
+It is wise to put any pandoc operations under a timeout, to avoid DOS
+attacks that exploit these issues.
+If you are using the pandoc executable, you can add the command line
+options \f[CR]+RTS -M512M -RTS\f[R] (for example) to limit the heap size
+to 512MB.
+Note that the \f[CR]commonmark\f[R] parser (including
+\f[CR]commonmark_x\f[R] and \f[CR]gfm\f[R]) is much less vulnerable to
+pathological performance than the \f[CR]markdown\f[R] parser, so it is a
+better choice when processing untrusted input.
+.IP "6." 3
+The HTML generated by pandoc is not guaranteed to be safe.
+If \f[CR]raw_html\f[R] is enabled for the Markdown input, users can
+inject arbitrary HTML.
+Even if \f[CR]raw_html\f[R] is disabled, users can include dangerous
+content in URLs and attributes.
+To be safe, you should run all HTML generated from untrusted user input
+through an HTML sanitizer.
+.SH AUTHORS
+Copyright 2006\[en]2022 John MacFarlane (jgm\[at]berkeley.edu).
+Released under the GPL, version 2 or greater.
+This software carries no warranty of any kind.
+(See COPYRIGHT for full copyright and warranty notices.)
+For a full list of contributors, see the file AUTHORS.md in the pandoc
+source code.
+.PP
+The Pandoc source code may be downloaded
+from <https://hackage.haskell.org/package/pandoc> or
+<https://github.com/jgm/pandoc/releases>.  Further
+documentation is available at <https://pandoc.org>.
diff --git a/pandoc-cli.cabal b/pandoc-cli.cabal
--- a/pandoc-cli.cabal
+++ b/pandoc-cli.cabal
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 cabal-version:   2.4
 name:            pandoc-cli
-version:         0.1.1.1
+version:         3.1.10
 build-type:      Simple
 license:         GPL-2.0-or-later
 license-file:    COPYING.md
@@ -11,13 +11,14 @@
 stability:       alpha
 homepage:        https://pandoc.org
 category:        Text
-tested-with:     GHC == 8.6.5, GHC == 8.8.4, GHC == 8.10.7, GHC == 9.0.2,
-                 GHC == 9.2.5, GHC == 9.4.4
 synopsis:        Conversion between documentation formats
 description:     Pandoc-cli provides a command-line executable that uses the
                  pandoc library to convert between markup formats.
 -- data-files:
--- extra-source-files:
+extra-source-files:
+                 man/pandoc.1
+                 man/pandoc-lua.1
+                 man/pandoc-server.1
 source-repository head
   type:          git
   location:      git://github.com/jgm/pandoc.git
@@ -67,7 +68,9 @@
   hs-source-dirs:  src
   main-is:         pandoc.hs
   buildable:       True
-  build-depends:   pandoc >= 3.0,
+  -- Note: we always link to an exact version of pandoc, with the
+  -- same version as this package:
+  build-depends:   pandoc == 3.1.10,
                    text
   other-modules:   PandocCLI.Lua
                  , PandocCLI.Server
@@ -86,7 +89,7 @@
 
   if flag(lua)
     build-depends:   hslua-cli         >= 1.4.1 && < 1.5,
-                     pandoc-lua-engine >= 0.2 && < 0.3,
+                     pandoc-lua-engine >= 0.2.1 && < 0.3,
                      temporary         >= 1.1 && < 1.4
     hs-source-dirs:  lua
   else
